Aldelo 3.0 Manual

Aldelo For Restaurants
User Manual
II
PUBLISHED BY
Aldelo Systems Inc.
P.O. Box 271
Standard, CA 95373
Copyright 1997-2006 by Aldelo Systems Inc.
All rights reserved. No Part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permissions of the publisher.
Printed and Bound in the United States of America.
This manual is available through Aldelo Systems Inc. and resellers worldwide. For further information
about other languages that the manual may be translated in, please contact Aldelo Systems Inc. or visit
our Web site at www.aldelo.com. Send comments about this manual to contact@aldelo.com
Aldelo For Restaurants, Aldelo Polling Server, Aldelo Gift Card Server, Aldelo Localization
Manager, Aldelo Fingerprint Server, Aldelo Hotel Integrator, Aldelo Kitchen Display Server,
Aldelo Advanced Fingerprint Server, Aldelo EDC Server, Aldelo eOrder Server, Aldelo
Aldelo Accounting Integrator, Aldelo Liquor Controller Server, Aldelo Reporter are trademarks of
Aldelo Systems Inc. Other products or company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of
their respective owners.
The example companies, organizations, products, logos, people, places, and events depicted herein are
fictitious. No association with any real company, organization, product, logo, person, place or event is
intended or should be inferred.
Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Table of Contents
III
PART 1 GETTING STARTED _____________________________________1

Chapter 1 POS Hardware ___________________________________________________________ 2
Server Computer _________________________________________________________________ 2
What Defines the Server _________________________________________________________ 2
Minimum/Recommended Requirements _____________________________________________ 3
Software on the Server ___________________________________________________________ 3
Client Computer__________________________________________________________________ 4
What Defines the Client __________________________________________________________ 4
Minimum/Recommended Requirements _____________________________________________ 4
Software on the Client ___________________________________________________________ 4
Touch Screens ___________________________________________________________________ 5
All-In-One Terminals____________________________________________________________ 5
Touch Monitors ________________________________________________________________ 5
Printers _________________________________________________________________________ 5
Interfaces _____________________________________________________________________ 5
Serial ______________________________________________________________________ 6
Parallel _____________________________________________________________________ 6
Ethernet ____________________________________________________________________ 7
USB _______________________________________________________________________ 7
Printer Roles_____________________________________________________________________ 8
Receipt _______________________________________________________________________ 8
Kitchen_______________________________________________________________________ 8
Bar __________________________________________________________________________ 8
Label ________________________________________________________________________ 9
Report________________________________________________________________________ 9
MSR Readers ___________________________________________________________________ 10
Keyboard Interface_____________________________________________________________ 10
USB Interface_________________________________________________________________ 10
Serial Interface ________________________________________________________________ 10
Pole Displays ___________________________________________________________________ 11
Command Set_________________________________________________________________ 11
Serial _______________________________________________________________________ 11
Cash Drawers ___________________________________________________________________ 11
Printer Driven_________________________________________________________________ 11
Serial _______________________________________________________________________ 11
MICR Readers __________________________________________________________________ 12
Barcode Readers ________________________________________________________________ 12
USB Interface_________________________________________________________________ 12
Weight Scale ___________________________________________________________________ 13
Caller ID_______________________________________________________________________ 13
Coin Changer ___________________________________________________________________ 13
IV
Table of Contents
Chapter 2 Network Hardware ______________________________________________________ 14

Physical Network ________________________________________________________________ 15
Cabling______________________________________________________________________ 15
Hardware ____________________________________________________________________ 15
NIC Cards _________________________________________________________________ 16
Hubs ______________________________________________________________________ 16
Switches ___________________________________________________________________ 16
Routers ____________________________________________________________________ 17
Wireless Access Points _______________________________________________________ 17
Assembling Your Network ________________________________________________________ 18
Starting the Network ___________________________________________________________ 18
Chapter 3 Network Software _______________________________________________________ 19
Configuring Windows for Networking _______________________________________________ 20
Windows 2000 ________________________________________________________________ 20
Windows XP Pro ______________________________________________________________ 22
Testing Your Network ____________________________________________________________ 23
Chapter 4 POS Hardware Setup ____________________________________________________ 24
Setting up the Terminal ___________________________________________________________ 25
Setting up the POS Printers ________________________________________________________ 25
Windows 2000 ________________________________________________________________ 26
Sharing Printers in Windows 2000_______________________________________________ 26
Windows XP Pro ______________________________________________________________ 27
Sharing Printers in Windows XP Pro _____________________________________________ 27
Testing the POS Printers __________________________________________________________ 28
Setting up the Cash Drawer ________________________________________________________ 29
Printer Driven_________________________________________________________________ 29
Serial _______________________________________________________________________ 29
Setting up the Customer Display ____________________________________________________ 30
Setting up the MICR Reader _______________________________________________________ 30
Setting up the MSR Reader ________________________________________________________ 31
Keyboard ____________________________________________________________________ 31
Serial _______________________________________________________________________ 31
Setting up the Barcode Reader ______________________________________________________ 32
Setting up the Coin Changer _______________________________________________________ 32
Setting up Caller ID ______________________________________________________________ 32
Modem ______________________________________________________________________ 32
Multi-Line Caller ID Device _____________________________________________________ 32
Table of Contents
PART 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION _________33

Chapter 5 Software Setup __________________________________________________________ 34
Installing Aldelo For Restaurants____________________________________________________ 35
Adjusting Windows ______________________________________________________________ 36
Proper Screen Resolution________________________________________________________ 36
16 Bit Color Palette or Better_____________________________________________________ 36
Small Font 96 DPI _____________________________________________________________ 37
Keep the Taskbar on Top of Other Windows Taskbar option ____________________________ 37
Setting the Taskbar to Auto Hide__________________________________________________ 37
Multiple Languages ______________________________________________________________ 38
Supported Language & Special Multilingual Capabilities _______________________________ 38
Language Settings in Windows 2000/XP____________________________________________ 39
Adding Chinese in Windows 2000_______________________________________________ 39
Adding Chinese in Windows XP ________________________________________________ 40
Spanish ALT codes ____________________________________________________________ 41
Adding a New Font to Windows.__________________________________________________ 41
Registering & Activating Aldelo For Restaurants _______________________________________ 42
Internet Registration____________________________________________________________ 43
Software Activation ____________________________________________________________ 43
Sharing the Database folder ________________________________________________________ 44
Sharing in Windows 2000 _______________________________________________________ 44
Sharing in Windows XP Home ___________________________________________________ 45
Sharing in Windows XP Professional ______________________________________________ 46
Selecting a Database _____________________________________________________________ 47
Creating a Database ____________________________________________________________ 48
Connecting to a Database over the Network _________________________________________ 48
Information Data Entry ___________________________________________________________ 50
General Settings _______________________________________________________________ 50
How To Convert Control Codes___________________________________________________ 57
Code Conversion Chart _________________________________________________________ 58
Table Setup __________________________________________________________________ 60
Employee Setup _______________________________________________________________ 64
Menu Setup __________________________________________________________________ 72
Inventory Setup _______________________________________________________________ 93
PART 3 SOFTWARE OPERATION_______________________________103

Chapter 6 Opening Procedures_____________________________________________________ 104
Time Cards____________________________________________________________________ 105
Clocking In__________________________________________________________________ 105
Viewing Your Schedule ________________________________________________________ 106
Earnings Report ______________________________________________________________ 106
Register a Pager ______________________________________________________________ 106
VI
Table of Contents
Starting Your Bank _____________________________________________________________ 108

Starting Staff Bank____________________________________________________________ 108
Cashier In ___________________________________________________________________ 109
Chapter 7 Hostess Procedures _____________________________________________________ 111
Reservations___________________________________________________________________ 112
Creating A Reservation ________________________________________________________ 112
Changing A Reservation _______________________________________________________ 113
Checking In A Reservation _____________________________________________________ 113
Waiting List ___________________________________________________________________ 114
Add A Customer to the Waiting List ______________________________________________ 114
Check In the Customer_________________________________________________________ 114
Assigning a Table_______________________________________________________________ 115
Chapter 8 Dine In Orders _________________________________________________________ 116
Order Entry ___________________________________________________________________ 117
Adding Items ________________________________________________________________ 119
Voiding Items________________________________________________________________ 120
Re-Ordering Items ____________________________________________________________ 120
Holding Items________________________________________________________________ 121
Releasing the Hold ____________________________________________________________ 124
Splitting an Order_____________________________________________________________ 124
Combine Orders ______________________________________________________________ 125
Ordering a Half ______________________________________________________________ 125
Item Details _________________________________________________________________ 125
Ordering Multiple Quantity _____________________________________________________ 125
Applying Discounts ___________________________________________________________ 126
Applying Surcharges __________________________________________________________ 126
Applying Credits _____________________________________________________________ 127
Changing the Order Type_______________________________________________________ 127
Adding a Customer Name to an Order_____________________________________________ 128
Changing the Number of Guests on the Check ______________________________________ 128
Changing the Table Number of the Check__________________________________________ 128
Recall Another Check on the Same Table __________________________________________ 129
Changing Seat Numbers in Order Entry____________________________________________ 129
MISC Button __________________________________________________________________ 130
Change Price ________________________________________________________________ 130
Assign Seats _________________________________________________________________ 130
Clear Order__________________________________________________________________ 130
No Sale_____________________________________________________________________ 131
Change Server _______________________________________________________________ 131
Gratuity ____________________________________________________________________ 131
Cust. Lookup ________________________________________________________________ 131
Recall Order _________________________________________________________________ 132
Create Labels ________________________________________________________________ 132
Retail Screen ________________________________________________________________ 132
Table of Contents
VII
Tax Exempt _________________________________________________________________ 132

No Kitchen / Bar _____________________________________________________________ 132
To Secondary Language________________________________________________________ 133
Lock Screens ________________________________________________________________ 133
Modifier System________________________________________________________________ 134
Normal Modifiers_____________________________________________________________ 134
Manual Modifiers_____________________________________________________________ 135
Forced Modifiers _____________________________________________________________ 135
Modifier Builder Template _____________________________________________________ 136
Pizza Builder System ____________________________________________________________ 137
Chapter 9 Bar Tab Orders ________________________________________________________ 138
Order Entry for Bar Tab__________________________________________________________ 139
Create a New Bar Tab _________________________________________________________ 139
Setting Up Bar Tab Efficiency ___________________________________________________ 140
Chapter 10 Take Out Orders ______________________________________________________ 141
Order Entry for Take Out_________________________________________________________ 142
Creating a New Take Out Order _________________________________________________ 143
Chapter 11 Drive Thru Orders_____________________________________________________ 144
Order Entry for Drive Thru _______________________________________________________ 145
Creating a New Drive Thru Order ________________________________________________ 145
Marking a Drive Thru Order as Complete __________________________________________ 145
Chapter 12 Delivery Orders _______________________________________________________ 146
Order Entry for Delivery _________________________________________________________ 147
Creating a Delivery Order ______________________________________________________ 148
Chapter 13 Delivery Procedures____________________________________________________ 149
Assigning a Delivery Order _______________________________________________________ 150
Using the Default Delivery Assignment Procedures __________________________________ 150
Driver Dispatch screen Assignment Procedures. _____________________________________ 150
Using Delivery Directions and Route Planning ________________________________________ 151
MapPoint Integration Setup _____________________________________________________ 151
Using MapPoint Integration_____________________________________________________ 151
Viewing Delivery Order Status ____________________________________________________ 152
Using the Delivery Status screen _________________________________________________ 152
Chapter 14 Quick Service _________________________________________________________ 153
Using the Quick Service Screen____________________________________________________ 154
Chapter 15 Recall Procedures______________________________________________________ 155
Recall Operations_______________________________________________________________ 156
Batch Transfer _______________________________________________________________ 156
VIII
Table of Contents
Chapter 16 Void Procedures _______________________________________________________ 157

Void Operations ________________________________________________________________ 158
Chapter 17 Cashier Operations ____________________________________________________ 159
No Sale_______________________________________________________________________ 160
Pay Out ______________________________________________________________________ 160
General Payout_______________________________________________________________ 160
Wage Advance _______________________________________________________________ 160
Manager Cash Out ____________________________________________________________ 161
Issuing Refunds ________________________________________________________________ 161
Chapter 18 Gift Card Procedures___________________________________________________ 162
Issuing Gift Cards ______________________________________________________________ 163
Recharging Gift Cards ___________________________________________________________ 164
Checking Balances______________________________________________________________ 164
Chapter 19 Order Settlement Procedures ____________________________________________ 165
Cashier Settle Operations_________________________________________________________ 166
Settling in the Main POS screen _________________________________________________ 166
Cash _____________________________________________________________________ 167
Check ____________________________________________________________________ 167
Credit Card________________________________________________________________ 167
ATM / Debit Card __________________________________________________________ 167
Gift Certificate _____________________________________________________________ 168
House Account_____________________________________________________________ 168
Complementary ____________________________________________________________ 168
Room Charge ______________________________________________________________ 168
Settling in the Order Entry screen ________________________________________________ 168
Settling Using Staff Bank_________________________________________________________ 169
Settling Using Driver Money Drop _________________________________________________ 169
Chapter 20 Closing Procedures ____________________________________________________ 170
Closing the Cash Drawer _________________________________________________________ 171
Quick Sign Out_______________________________________________________________ 172
Closing Your Staff Bank _______________________________________________________ 173
Clocking Out __________________________________________________________________ 174
Running A Closing Report________________________________________________________ 174
Chapter 21 Manager Operations ___________________________________________________ 175
Time Cards____________________________________________________________________ 176
Editing Time Cards ___________________________________________________________ 176
Orders________________________________________________________________________ 176
Reverting or Re-Opening an Order _______________________________________________ 176
Cash Drawers __________________________________________________________________ 177
Reverting or Re-Opening a Cash Drawer___________________________________________ 177
Table of Contents
IX
Operations Center ______________________________________________________________ 178

Receive Payments Section ______________________________________________________ 178
Pay In House Charges _______________________________________________________ 178
Pay Bad Checks ____________________________________________________________ 178
Auto Pay All Open Deliveries _________________________________________________ 179
Revenue Center Section ________________________________________________________ 179
Closing Report _____________________________________________________________ 180
Next Day Transfer __________________________________________________________ 180
Bank Liability Report________________________________________________________ 181
Register Report ____________________________________________________________ 181
Bank Deposit ______________________________________________________________ 181
Gift Certificate List _________________________________________________________ 182
Cust. Credit List ____________________________________________________________ 182
Order Pmt List _____________________________________________________________ 182
Bad Check List_____________________________________________________________ 182
Daily Receipt Summary ______________________________________________________ 182
Z Report __________________________________________________________________ 183
Re-Open Cashier Out ________________________________________________________ 183
Reverting or Re-Opening a Cash Drawer___________________________________________ 183
Re-Open Deposit ___________________________________________________________ 184
Frequent Diner Section ________________________________________________________ 184
New Freq. Diner____________________________________________________________ 184
Track Order _______________________________________________________________ 184
Redemption _______________________________________________________________ 185
Freq. Diner Acct. List________________________________________________________ 185
In House Charge Section _______________________________________________________ 185
Maintain In House Accounts __________________________________________________ 185
Create In House Statement____________________________________________________ 186
In House Account List _______________________________________________________ 186
Customer Files _____________________________________________________________ 186
Inventory Activities Section_____________________________________________________ 186
Shopping List ______________________________________________________________ 187
New PO (Purchase Order) ____________________________________________________ 187
Review PO ________________________________________________________________ 187
Receive Items______________________________________________________________ 188
Phy. Count Sheet ___________________________________________________________ 188
Phy. Inv. Count ____________________________________________________________ 188
Inv. Prep. Forecast __________________________________________________________ 189
Inventory Items ____________________________________________________________ 189
Menu Recipe ______________________________________________________________ 189
Other Tools Section ___________________________________________________________ 189
Caller ID Log ______________________________________________________________ 189
Caller ID Switch____________________________________________________________ 190
Customer Incidents _________________________________________________________ 190
Assign Table ______________________________________________________________ 190
To Training Mode __________________________________________________________ 190
Table of Contents
Edit Work Schedule _________________________________________________________ 190
Add Cash To Bank __________________________________________________________ 191
Calculator _________________________________________________________________ 191
Emp. Still Working _________________________________________________________ 191
Driver Summary____________________________________________________________ 191
Open Order Report__________________________________________________________ 191
Menu Item Sales By Category _________________________________________________ 191
Sales By Category Report ____________________________________________________ 192
Sales By Menu Item Report ___________________________________________________ 192
Server Gratuity Report _______________________________________________________ 192
Chapter 22 Maintenance Activities _________________________________________________ 193

General Activities ______________________________________________________________ 194
Pay Employees_______________________________________________________________ 194
New Local Email _____________________________________________________________ 194
Review Local Email___________________________________________________________ 195
Video Surveillance Control Center _______________________________________________ 195
Video Surveillance Review Browser ______________________________________________ 196
Create Menu Item Labels _______________________________________________________ 196
Maintain Pay Outs ____________________________________________________________ 197
Maintain Manager Cash Outs____________________________________________________ 197
Global Menu Item Price Change _________________________________________________ 198
Export Menu Item Sales________________________________________________________ 199
Customer Activities _____________________________________________________________ 200
Maintain Customer Records_____________________________________________________ 200
Create Customer Address Labels _________________________________________________ 201
Maintain In House Charge Accounts ______________________________________________ 201
Create In House Charge Statements_______________________________________________ 202
Maintain Frequent Diner Accounts _______________________________________________ 203
Maintain Frequent Diner Tracking________________________________________________ 203
Maintain Customer Credits _____________________________________________________ 204
Maintain Gift Certificates ______________________________________________________ 205
New Bad Check ______________________________________________________________ 206
Follow Up Bad Check _________________________________________________________ 206
Inventory Activities _____________________________________________________________ 207
New Purchase Order __________________________________________________________ 207
Review Purchase Order ________________________________________________________ 207
Create PO From Shopping List __________________________________________________ 208
Create Inventory Item Labels____________________________________________________ 208
Receive Inventory Items _______________________________________________________ 209
Physical Inventory Count_______________________________________________________ 209
Maintenance Activities __________________________________________________________ 210
Monitor Client Connections_____________________________________________________ 210
Remove All Access Denied Logs_________________________________________________ 210
Remove All Caller ID Logs _____________________________________________________ 210
Remove All Customer Names From Orders ________________________________________ 210
Table of Contents
XI
Remove All Redeemed Gift Certificate MSR Card Information _________________________ 211
Remove Prior Manager Cash Outs________________________________________________ 211
Remove Prior Reservations _____________________________________________________ 211
Delete Master Data____________________________________________________________ 211
Refresh Cumulative Grand Total _________________________________________________ 211
Third Party Add Ins _____________________________________________________________ 212
New _______________________________________________________________________ 212
Calculator___________________________________________________________________ 212
Notepad ____________________________________________________________________ 212
Chapter 23 Database Maintenance__________________________________________________ 213
Database & Support Files ________________________________________________________ 214
Database Engine Used ___________________________________________________________ 214
Database Recommended Limits____________________________________________________ 214
Compact Database ______________________________________________________________ 215
Jet Compact Utility _____________________________________________________________ 215
Backup Database _______________________________________________________________ 215
Chapter 24 Import/Export ________________________________________________________ 216
Exporting Data _________________________________________________________________ 217
Import Data ___________________________________________________________________ 217
Import New Resource Database____________________________________________________ 217
Exporting Reports ______________________________________________________________ 217
Chapter 25 Reports ______________________________________________________________ 218
PART 4 APPENDIX ___________________________________________297

Chapter 26 Field Name Descriptions ________________________________________________ 298
Store Settings __________________________________________________________________ 299
Security Settings _______________________________________________________________ 333
Station Settings ________________________________________________________________ 342
Advanced Settings ______________________________________________________________ 351
XII
Introduction
Introduction
Aldelo For Restaurants software solution covers your restaurant operations with a full array of features.
Whether youre just looking to automate your order entry and cash register procedures, prevent
employee mistakes, prevent cash drawer shortages, better track inventory, start offering in house charge
accounts, start offering a frequent diner program, or to start tracking customer sales history, youve
chosen the right solution to do the job!
Aldelo For Restaurants software solution is affordable and feature rich. Besides the capability as a fullfeatured restaurant point of sale system, the following features are also included at no additional cost:
Inventory Management Module with Auto Depletion By Sales Capability
Gift Certificate Sales, Tracking, & Redemption Module
Customer Credit Voucher, Tracking, & Redemption Module
In House Charge Account & Billing Statement Creation Module
Frequent Diner Module with Customized Automatic Reward Creation
Microsoft MapPoint 2004 Mapping Software Integration
Up to 8 line Caller ID Monitoring
Full featured Reservation and Waiting list Module.
Staff and Customer Paging
Video Surveillance Snapshot Feature
Localization Manager with 100% Multilingual Support
Quick Service Screen for Fast Food Operations
Remote Support Feature for Quick Problem Resolution
These modules would normally cost hundreds or even several thousands more with our competitors
packages. However, at Aldelo Systems Inc., we believe in providing a complete package at an
affordable price, enabling you with the technology that will propel your restaurant business to new
levels!
The Aldelo For Restaurants software solution is extremely user friendly and very simple to learn.
However, we still feel that a complete manual that covers every feature in the software would be
necessary. In order to take the full advantage of our software system, we strongly recommend that you
take some time to read this manual before diving into our software solution.
Introduction
XIII
The Structure of the Manual

We have divided this manual into parts and chapters in order to help you better focus on the key topics.
You are not required to have prior knowledge of any restaurant point of sale software or even our
software solution to use this manual. We are assuming that youre diving into the world of automated
POS solutions for the first time. This manual will attempt to teach you everything that you need to
know about using our POS software solution.
We strongly recommend that you install Aldelo For Restaurants on a computer and try the procedures
defined in the manual.
To help you read this manual faster, we have introduced several standard conventions used throughout
this manual. The standard conventions will help you spot the action, names, or other topics from the
normal contents. The following are the conventions used in the manual:
Element
Meaning
Bold
Any reference to feature names will be show in Bold.
Quotes
Any reference to a button name will appear in quotes (e.g. click the
Enter button.).
Location Path
The shorthand notation used to navigate through the software will

take the following form Name > Name > Name where Name can be
a button, menu item, tab, etc. For example Back Office > Setup >
General Settings > Cash Trays represents directions to the window
used to define your cash trays.
Part 1
Getting Started
POS Hardware
Chapter 1
POS Hardware
Congratulations on purchasing your new POS system! You have taken another step in becoming a very
successful restaurant entrepreneur. In this chapter, you will be introduced to the many different types of
hardware that may be present in your restaurant. This chapter will also go over the benefits and pitfalls
of each type of hardware which should help minimize mistakes when performing the system setup.
Server Computer
In a POS environment, one computer must be responsible for maintaining the software database. This
computer is usually faster and more robust than other computers in the network. In situations where
there is only one computer in the POS network, then that computer will act as the server. Servers can
come in many shapes and sizes. They do not necessarily need to be a computer with enterprise level
software and hardware capable of millions of transactions a second. Most of the time, the server
computer is simply the computer that is the central location for most of the stored database information
and management functions.
What Defines the Server
In Aldelo For Restaurants, the one main function of the server is to hold the database that all other POS
systems will connect to when performing transactions. It does not require any special operating system
or hardware to be considered the server computer. Once a database is created on any particular system
and other systems are connected to that database, the system is thereafter considered the database
server. When calling Aldelo Systems Inc. for technical support, they will almost always ask which
computer is the database server when dealing with database related issues.
The server is also responsible for maintaining time synchronization between the client stations and the
server. This means that if one of your client machines has a different time than the server time, the
server will change the client time to match. This is a very important function since all reports are based
on the date/time stamp of each transaction.
Note: Time Synchronization requires the TCP settings in the Back Office to be set up.
POS Hardware
Minimum/Recommended Requirements
The requirements for computer software and operating systems change just as fast as new hardware and
software is released. Most of the time minimum requirements for software are determined by what
operating system they are running on. Obviously we cannot run Aldelo For Restaurants on anything
less than the operating system minimum requirements due to the operating system needing AT LEAST
this amount of system resources. This should be considered a baseline for your system when trying to
figure out how fast you need your system to be. These minimum requirements are meant to give the
person a good understanding of what is required for the system to even run. These are not meant as a
guideline for purchasing a system. The minimum requirements for Aldelo For Restaurants can be
found on the website at www.aldelo.com.
When purchasing a system, the recommended hardware should be used to search for the right hardware
for the system. These specifications are the companys recommendation for the system to perform up
to the standards that will be needed in the environment that they were designed for. Anything less than
the recommendation and the customer may experience performance that is slower than expected. The
recommended system requirements of Aldelo For Restaurants can also be found at www.aldelo.com.
Tech Tip: When you run several applications on one machine you should monitor
how much RAM you are using. Assuming you are using Windows XP there are two
things to watch under the Task Manager > Performance Tab. These are Physical
Memory Total and Commit Charge Total. If your Commit Charge is ever more than
your Physical Memory Total, you need to install more RAM. To get to Task Manager
press CTRL+ALT+DELETE and click Task Manager.
Software on the Server

In any network environment, the server computer is responsible for many different tasks. So far the
server computer in our POS network is responsible for holding the database and allowing other systems
to connect to it. Along with this task, the server can also be used to run programs that compliment
Aldelo For Restaurants. These programs include but are not limited to, Aldelo Database Manager,
Aldelo Gift Card Server (if purchased), Aldelo Polling Server (if purchased), Aldelo Localization
Manager, Aldelo For Restaurants Wireless (if purchased), Aldelo Fingerprint Server, Aldelo Kitchen
Display Server, Aldelo Hotel Integrator and other third party applications.
For each one of these programs, there are system requirements that need to be addressed. One system
requirement that is common is an internet connection on the server computer. This is required for many
of the programs mentioned above.
Tech Tip: It is very helpful in troubleshooting if all systems on the network are
connected to the internet. This allows technicians at Aldelo Systems Inc. to remotely
connect while on the phone with customers to assist with any issues they may be
having and also cuts down dramatically on call length.
POS Hardware
Client Computer
We have talked about the computer responsible for maintaining the database and performing other tasks
related to POS. This section will talk about the computers that are responsible for sending transactions
to the server computer. These are the systems that are usually visible to the public and get the most use.
Since they are not processing transactions from other systems, their hardware does not need to be as
robust as the server computers. Also, receipt printers can usually be found connected to the client
computers since they are near the places where the customers are being served.
What Defines the Client
The only thing that defines the client computer is the fact that the database does not reside on the
system. This system is only responsible for sending transactions to the server computer to be
processed. If this system is removed from the network, normal operations will still occur since the
database resides on the server computer.
Minimum/Recommended Requirements
The requirements for the server listed on the website are a little higher than the ones for the client
computer. Since the client will not be performing as much processing as the server, the hardware does
not need to be as fast. The minimum requirements are still the same but the recommended change
slightly.
As before, the recommendations are guidelines when purchasing a system. Use these instead of the
minimum requirements. If your restaurant is very busy, the recommended hardware may not be
enough. As always, consult with your reseller or call Aldelo Sales Dept. with any questions you may
have when purchasing your hardware.
Software on the Client
The most common configuration for client systems is to only run Aldelo For Restaurants. The more
software running on the system, the slower the response may be when using the system. When
restaurants get busy, this is not acceptable. If you purchase a system from a company like Dell, HP, or
other vendors of this kind, they love to install software that will not be used and may slow the system
down. Go through the system and remove any software that you will not use on these systems. The
software that will affect performance will show up in the lower right hand corner of the Windows
Desktop next to the time. These use small portions of system memory and processor time to
continuously run. If you see one that you do not use, uninstall it.
POS Hardware
Touch Screens
All-In-One Terminals
The first choice customers have is the use of an all in one terminal. These units contain everything the
customer will need in a POS environment and are usually designed to make installation much easier.
These units also usually come standard with many more ports than a standard pc. There are many
advantages to these units including smaller footprint, more ports for devices, built-in accessories like
MSR and customer display, and one manufacturer to contact for the unit. This is a big plus when
dealing with issues. Normally, you would have a manufacturer for the system, one for the touch screen,
one for the MSR, and one for the customer display. That is potentially 4 companies to call if something
goes wrong with the hardware. With All-In-One terminals, you make one phone call for all issues
related to the terminal.
Touch Monitors
The next choice a customer has when selecting a touch screen is a touch monitor. These look just like a
normal monitor except they are touch enabled. They support the typical POS screen resolutions you
can find in the market. They require the VGA cable to be connected to the computer as well as a serial
cable or USB cable connected to the appropriate port on the computer. The serial or USB connection is
responsible for the touch features of the monitor.
Printers
Printers play a vital role in the POS environment. Restaurants and customers rely on printers to print
receipts, reports, labels, and other forms of hardcopy transactions. Printers are a must in a POS
installation and since there are many different kinds of printers. This section will go over the different
uses and types of printers that are found in many POS installations. First topic is interfaces.
Interfaces
Currently, there are 4 main interfaces for POS printers. Serial, Parallel, Ethernet, and USB. All are
supported by Aldelo For Restaurants. Each has its advantage and disadvantage. These will be covered
in the following section to give you a good understanding of what you will need in your installation.
Most printers come with interfaces that are built into the printer, but there are some that come with slots
that can accommodate switching interfaces if the customer needs to change it. These are very handy if
you run into a situation where your business needs change and you dont want to buy a new printer.
POS Hardware
Serial
This is probably the most common interface found in restaurant POS printers since they are an
inexpensive interface type. Serial printers have also been around longer than any other interface type
and will continue to find their way into installations for years to come.
The advantage of serial printers is they have a maximum distance of 50 feet. Some serial printers can
go further but they require a special serial port on the computer that will send the signal farther without
errors. With the distance being so far from the computer, they are used a lot in kitchen applications
where cables can be run from the front of the restaurant to the kitchen area.
The downside to serial printers is the setup. Drivers of course need to be installed but there is a second
step in the setup. Since serial printers rely on the computers COM port, the port settings must be
configured correctly in order for the printer to operate. If the serial printer came with a manual, the
settings should be listed in the manual. If the printer did not come with a manual, one can be
downloaded from the printer manufacturers website. These settings are the baud rate, data bits, parity,
stop bits, and flow control. The two most common mistakes in the settings are the baud rate and the
flow control. The printer will need to be opened or print an internal test print usually by holding down
the Feed button while turning it on to find what settings the printer is currently set to. Every printer is
different so check the manual to find out how to get the internal test print.
Parallel
The next type of printer is the parallel printer. This printer costs the same as serial, can go less distance,
but has less setup. The parallel printer is the second most installed interface type and is mostly used in
receipt type applications where the printer is not far from the computer it is connected to.
The main advantage of the parallel printer is the ease of setup. With parallel printers, you only need to
install the drivers provided by the manufacturer to get the printer up and running. Once the drivers are
installed you should be able to print a Windows test page to verify that the printer is working correctly.
The disadvantage to a parallel printer is the distance. The parallel interface can only support a cable up
to 25 feet from the computer. Since it has limited distance and is easier to setup, the parallel printer is
used for receipt, bar, and label applications where distance is not a factor.
There are ways to extend the parallel interface to go beyond 25 feet but these require special devices to
change the type of communications used between the printer and the computer. One is the High Speed
Parallel Line Extender from ATEN-USA. The two devices will connect to your printer and computer
parallel port, one on each end. They use a straight through phone cable to connect the devices together
and can reach distances up to 1000 feet. Since the devices are relatively cheap, this is a good way to
overcome the distance problem.
POS Hardware
The other way to extend the distance is to use a print server. Print servers use TCP/IP for
communications therefore are not bound to the 25 foot distance. Print servers come in many different
types from single port models to models with 3 or more ports. An example of a single port print server
is the Netgear PS101. This will allow your parallel printer to extend its distance up to 300 feet away
from the network hub or switch. Since they connect to the network, the print servers need to be
configured with an IP address as well as any other settings used in the network.
Ethernet
The third interface type is Ethernet. Ethernet printers are becoming more and more popular in POS
installations since they can go further than serial and are not reliant on the computer to stay operational.
They require more setup than parallel and about the same amount as serial. Setup for an Ethernet
printer closely resembles setting up your computer to communicate on the network. Both use an IP
address, subnet mask, and device name. The utility to configure these settings varies from
manufacturer to manufacturer but they will all have ways to configure the printer to communicate on
the network.
There are two main advantages to using an Ethernet printer. The first is the distance. These printers
can be installed up to 300 feet away from the hub or switch they are connected to. That distance is
enough to cover the needs of almost any application the restaurant may need. Since they use normal
network cables, it is much easier to run these cables through walls and ceiling due to their much smaller
connector type. They use a normal RJ-45 connector which will fit through any nickel size hole.
The second advantage to the Ethernet printer is the fact that it does not rely on the computer to continue
to operate normally. Since the serial and parallel printers are connected to the computer, if the
computer ever fails or becomes unstable, the printers will also fail to operate. Ethernet printers
communicate on the network directly so they are not susceptible to computer related issues.
The disadvantage of Ethernet printers are the cost. They are more expensive than serial or parallel since
the technology is relatively new. As the technology matures the costs should come down and
eventually compete with serial and parallel. Until then, these printers are considered a luxury item and
are often passed up in favor of the cheaper serial and parallel models.
USB
The last interface type for printers is USB. USB stands for Universal Serial Bus and is becoming the de
facto standard for connecting any peripheral to a computer. Since they are designed to be extremely
easy to install, these printers are becoming more popular for customers that dont want the hassle of
settings or complex cabling. With USB, the drivers need to be installed and the printer plugged into
any USB interface on the computer. The USB interface is also designed to be connected and
disconnected while the computer is operational.
POS Hardware
The advantage of USB printers are that almost all computers today have plenty of USB ports to plug
devices into and can be found on mini-computers which save valuable space in a restaurant
environment. They are both easy to install and the cables are very small allowing for very clean
installations.
The disadvantages of USB are cost and distance. The cost of a USB printer is slightly more than serial
or parallel but not as much as Ethernet. The real downside to USB is the distance that the printer can be
from the computer. The maximum distance is 14 feet which is about half of what even parallel will go.
This limits the use of the USB printer to roles that require or allow the printer to be close to the
computer they are connected to.
Printer Roles
Receipt
One of the most important reasons for owning a POS system is to always generate readable error free
receipts. Many mistakes are made when things are written down by hand. To eliminate these mistakes,
computer generated and printed receipts are used. There are several different types of printers as
discussed previously. Within each of the different interface types, there are still more options to choose
from when purchasing a printer. For receipt printers, it is usually a good idea to use a thermal transfer
printer due to its speed. Fast receipts are a must when customers are waiting to pay their bill. Your
other option is to go with dot matrix, but since the speed is much slower, they are often passed over for
the quicker and quieter thermal.
Kitchen
Along with error free customer receipts, you must also have error free tickets to the kitchen to make the
most out of your POS investment. To accomplish this, the use of a kitchen printer is employed. With a
kitchen printer, tickets are generated in a consistent and reliable fashion, allowing your cooks to
concentrate on what they do best. Since the kitchen is hot and susceptible to grease, oil, and other
fluids, thermal tickets are not recommended. The reason they are not recommended is when the receipt
is subjected to high heat, the ticket will turn completely black since heat is the source used to create the
text. The option to thermal receipts is normal paper receipts printed by an impact printer. These are
usually not affected by heat or fluids and are much more durable in an industrial environment.
Bar
The bar is optional when it comes to what type of printer to use. Since there are usually not too many
hot items in a bar, the thermal will work well. A Thermal also works well if you have an extremely
busy bar and ticket speed is important. Dot Matrix printers can also be used in bars. They are
sometimes less expensive than thermal and work just as well. The one advantage to a Dot Matrix
printer for a bartender is the fact that they can hear the ticket printing. Sometimes this is a benefit when
the bartender is working the shift alone and needs to attend to customers as well as a server drink
station.
POS Hardware
Label
Label printers are often used in pizza restaurants and places where takeout or delivery is common.
These printers are used to create labels for weighted food items, delivery addresses, barcode labels, and
customer mailings. Currently, Aldelo For Restaurants supports two labels sizes. They are 1 x 3 and
4 x 1.5. The only label printer that has been tested and is known to work with Aldelo For Restaurants
is the Eltron LP2844.
Report
Most reports in Aldelo For Restaurants can be printed to a report printer. A report printer in the
software can be any desktop printer that prints on 8.5 x 11 paper. These can be inkjet printers or laser
printers or any printer that performs your everyday print jobs. Laser jet printers are recommended since
the price of a laser jet has come down to compete with ink jets. LaserJets are much faster and do not
require expensive and messy ink cartridges. They do require toner but the amount of time between
replacements is usually much better than ink.
POS Hardware
10
MSR Readers
MSR Readers allow customers the ability to quickly input information into the POS system through the
use of a small plastic card with a magnetic strip on the back. These are usually credit cards or employee
access cards. They can be 1, 2, or 3 track readers to read the tracks programmed on the cards magnetic
strip. The readers sometimes need to be programmed to tell the reader how many tracks it is suppose to
read and where the end of each track is. Common configuration is track 1 start with a percentage (%)
and ends with a question mark (?). The second track starts with a semi-colon (;) and ends with a
question mark (?). The following are the different interfaces the devices come in.
Keyboard Interface
MSR readers come in three different types. The first of the three is the keyboard interface. This
interface uses the keyboard port on your computer to plug into. The cable used for this device has a
splitter so you can also connect your keyboard to the computer. If you plan on not having a keyboard
connected to the system, it is important that you connect a keyboard terminator on the end of the splitter
to simulate a keyboard being connected to the system.
USB Interface
The next type of interface is the USB interface. This is becoming a popular interface type for the same
reason all USB devices are becoming popular. Ease of installation and availability of ports. Many
systems today come with 2 or more USB ports which can be expanded to have as many as 127 devices
connected to them with the use of USB hubs and what is called daisy chaining. The only requirement
for the USB MSR reader is that the drivers must be installed before attempting to plug in the reader.
Serial Interface
The last type of MSR reader interface is serial. Like any serial device, there are settings that must be
checked before the device will work. The correct COM port must also be selected or the device will not
function in Aldelo For Restaurants. Again, the device drivers must be installed (if there are any) before
the device is installed. Serial devices require the system to be restarted so the operating system has a
chance to detect that the device has been installed.
Tech Tip: A good way to test this device is to open up Notepad and swipe an MSR
card through the reader. If you see the contents of the card show up on the screen,
then the device should be working correctly.
11
POS Hardware
Pole Displays
Command Set
The current command set supported by Aldelo For Restaurants is the UTC Command or Ultimate
Command Set. These are the same command set but can be referred to by both names. This is the only
command set supported by Aldelo For Restaurants at this time. Be sure to always request
documentation to be sent with the pole display regarding control codes.
Serial
This is the most common type today. Be careful what COM port you plug the pole display into. Some
manufacturers design the pole display to only work on certain COM ports. Read the documentation
carefully before attempting to install any pole display. There are usually no drivers to install with pole
displays but again always refer to the documentation before proceeding.
Cash Drawers
Printer Driven
There are two types of cash drawers that currently work with Aldelo For Restaurants. The first type of
cash drawer is printer driven. This cash drawer receives commands from the printer at specified times
to open the cash drawer. Since there are so many different companies that make printers and cash
drawers, it is very important to verify that the two pieces of hardware will work together. Most
companies will have documentation on what cash drawers or printers they will work with. A quick call
to the company is also an easy way to double check that they will work. This is a very good idea since
it can be upsetting to get to the point of setting up the hardware only to find out they are not compatible.
There are also cables that need to be checked as well. Sometimes there are special cables that only
work with certain configurations.
Serial
The other cash drawer type is serial. This type plugs into the COM port of the computer and acts like a
normal serial device. The port settings need to be checked against the documentation to make sure the
settings are correct. There will also be control codes that will need to be used when setting the cash
drawer up in Aldelo For Restaurants so have the manual or guide that has these available for reference.
The most important one is the Open Code for the cash drawer. Without this, the drawer cannot be
opened by Aldelo For Restaurants.
POS Hardware
12
MICR Readers
Magnetic Ink Check Reader (MICR) is used to quickly enter in your customers checking account
number and their bank routing number from a check. This device will be useful if you plan to use
Aldelo For Restaurants Bad Check Tracking feature. Rather than having to key in your customers
routing number and account number from the check, you can just slide the check through the reader.
Keyboard Interface
These devices work much like the MSR reader. The MICR reader should come with a splitter cable to
also connect your keyboard to the computer. Just as with the MSR Reader, if you do not plan on having
a keyboard connected to the computer, you should install a keyboard terminator on the end of the
splitter cable to simulate a keyboard being connected.
Tech Tip: A good way to test this device is to open up Notepad and run a check
through the reader. If you see the account information show up on the screen, then the
device should be working correctly.
Barcode Readers
Barcode readers are programmed to read different types of barcodes depending on the type of barcode
reader you purchase. The most common type of barcode reader is the gun or Laser Scanner.
Keyboard Interface
This device is another device that can have both a keyboard interface and a USB interface. The first
interface is the keyboard interface. This again, plugs directly into a splitter cable that also allows a
keyboard to be connected at the same time. If you do not have a keyboard, make sure a keyboard
terminator is connected where the keyboard should be.
USB Interface
The second interface for the barcode reader is the USB interface. Simply install the drivers for the
scanner if needed and plug the scanner into any available USB port.
Tech Tip: A good way to test this device is to open up Notepad and scan a barcode on
any item you find. If you see the barcode information show up on the screen, then the
device should be working correctly.
13
POS Hardware
Weight Scale
The weight scale currently supported by Aldelo For Restaurants is the Avery Berkel NCI 6700 series
weight scale. The scale is a serial interface device and comes in 4 different models. The scale is used
to calculate weighted food in Aldelo For Restaurants and is mostly found in Deli counters or bakeries.
Caller ID
In delivery situations, it is a good idea to know who your customers are when they call. To do this,
there are devices that will pull the caller id information from the phone company and send it to a
software program to display to the user. Aldelo For Restaurants is one of those programs. These
devices come in 2, 4 and 8 port models and once installed will enable caller id information to all pos
terminals on the network. If you use a single line caller id modem, only that station will have caller id
information as Aldelo For Restaurants does not support sending information to the other terminals using
single line caller id devices.
The general rule of thumb is if the modem Caller ID works in HyperTerminal, then it should work in
Aldelo For Restaurants. HyperTerminal comes with Windows and can be used to troubleshoot you
modem. If the modem does not work, there are ways of getting the information development needs to
add the modem to the list of supported modems.
Coin Changer
If you run a small retail shop in your restaurant or use Aldelo For Restaurants to run a retail store, you
may need some way of quickly making change for your customer. Coin changers are very efficient at
dispensing correct change very quickly and accurately. These devices are simple to operate and
reliable.
Network Hardware
Chapter 2
Network Hardware
14
15
Network Hardware
Physical Network
With the need of more than 1 terminal comes the need to setup a network. This section will describe
different network devices and how they are important to a successful POS installation.
Cabling
One of the most underestimated parts of the network is the physical cabling. If this piece is not done
right, the whole network will become unusable. Many stories of bad installations can all be tracked to
one common issue. Bad cables or improperly installed cables.
The recommended way of handling cable installation is to have a professional company come out and
install the cables for you. This is especially recommended if there are walls to drill through or obstacles
in the ceiling that could interfere with the signals. Air conditioners and fluorescent lights are common
culprits in causing network outages.
If you want to do the cabling yourself, it is best to refer to the EIA/TIA 568 specifications. You can
find these by searching on Google for EIA TIA 568. Some places charge money for the full
document but you can gather enough free information to get the job done from various web sites.
The current standard for network cables is CAT5e or better. This will allow you to grow to Gigabit
Ethernet if you ever decide to upgrade in the future. Use this cable in conjunction with RJ-45
connectors to wire your restaurant.
In order to have enough places to connect your devices, it is a good idea to imagine where you will
want your terminals and also where you might want your terminals in the future. This will give you a
good idea of where you will need to install your cable runs. Leave yourself extra spots to plug devices
in since you never know what devices you will need in the future. Common practice is to use a two
plug receptacle allowing two connections to one wall jack. This will give you more flexibility in the
future.
You will also need to figure out where you want all your cables to terminate on the other end. If this is
in a back office or closet, make sure it is clean and well ventilated for the hub/switch/router to operate.
Hardware
When installing your network, you need to be able to connect all the wires in the network from the
individual devices to one central location so everything will be able to communicate. This job is done
by several different types of devices. These are NIC cards, hubs, switches, and routers. Routers can be
used but are more common in larger networks that require more complex setup.
Network Hardware
16
NIC Cards
To enable a computer or device to communicate on a network, it must have a device that speaks the
same language as the rest of the network. This job is done by the Network Interface Card. This device
takes information passed to it by the other parts of the computer and translates it to a format that the
network can use. This format is used to pass it to other nodes on the network. The most common types
of NIC cards are the 10/100 type which means they can communicate with either a 10Mb network or a
100Mb network. Some systems recently have begun to ship with 10/100/1000 type cards which will
enable you to transfer data up to 1000Mb or 1Gb per second assuming the rest of your network supports
it. For most applications 10/100 is fine.
Hubs
Hubs are the simplest device in a standard network. Their main purpose in life is to relay information
to other systems on the network. They do not do any kind of data processing or intelligent routing of
data. If information is received on one port of the hub, it is sent out every other port in a shotgun
fashion on the device hoping that the data will get to the right place. These devices have lights on them
that usually will indicate if the hub is able to communicate with the device on the other end. The lights
will usually blink when data is present.
As with NIC Cards, hubs come in different speeds. The most common type today (10/100) is capable
of switching between 10Mb and 100Mb per second speeds depending on the NIC card speed on the
other end. They also have Half/Full duplex capabilities. Full duplex is recommended to increase speed.
Hubs are generally ok for networks that dont pass a lot of information.
Switches
Switches are the intelligent cousins of the hub. They perform the same work as a hub but in a way that
eliminates collisions. Collisions occur when two devices try to communicate at the same time on the
network. Since hubs do not prevent collisions, this becomes an issue when you have a busy network
with several systems.
This is where switches come in handy. Hubs have no information about who is where on the network
whereas switches maintain a table of who sent what on the network. This allows the switch to only
send the data on the ports that the two systems are using to communicate. Combined with Full Duplex
communication, collisions are eliminated altogether. As with the hub, there are lights that will indicate
the status of each port on the device. Refer to the products manual for the exact details of the lights.
Since switches are priced very close to hubs, switches really are the best choices for simple networking.
17
Network Hardware
Routers
The last device in a network is a router. These devices are mainly used to communicate with separate
networks that do not share the same subnet. This topic can get very advanced and is beyond the scope
of this manual.
The most common application you will see a basic router is if you have a DSL or cable connection for
your internet. The device that some ISPs will send you has simple built in routing functions to connect
you to the rest of the world. Aldelo Systems Inc. has some applications that require a little knowledge
of these devices and is covered in the products respective manual.
Wireless Access Points
If you are using the wireless edition of the Aldelo For Restaurants software, you will need wireless
access points to allow the PDA a connection to the network. There are many factors that contribute to
how good your wireless signal is and how far it will go. One is the type of wireless protocol you are
using.
There are 2 main protocols in wide use today. There are actually many protocols but the two mainly
used are 802.11b and 802.11g. 802.11b is the most widely used at this time but that will probably
change in the future giving way to other faster, longer range protocols. One of those protocols now is
802.11g. The best solution at this point in time is to purchase a device that supports both protocols.
These devices are widely available and are relatively inexpensive. You can usually find them at your
local computer hardware store or retail chain like Wal-Mart, Staples, CompUSA, etc.
Network Hardware
18
Assembling Your Network

Once you have installed your cabling and purchased all your hardware components, you can start
connecting them to build your network. This section will assume you have already installed Windows
2000/XP on your terminals with a default configuration.
Since you have already done the work of figuring out where you want your terminals, all you will need
to do is place the terminals where you have network connections available. Once you have all your
terminals placed where you want them, you will need to connect them to the wall jack you previously
installed for the network with patch cables. These are short runs of Cat5e cables that are used to
connect a device to a wall jack or hub/switch/router. They come in many lengths or can be built to
custom lengths by a cable installer.
Once the terminals are connected to the network, you will need to connect the other end of the
connection to the hub/switch/router. This is usually in an office or in a secured location that cannot be
easily disconnected by employees or normal restaurant operations. Maintaining a clean environment
around the hub/switch/router will help prevent dust or debris from causing problems with the
connection inside the device. Also, try and keep the amount of movement of the device to a minimum.
Many times people place the device in a spot that has high traffic like a desk or a bookshelf where other
objects are coming and going, moving the device around. This is not good for the cable connection to
the device. It is also good practice to mount the device with screws to prevent the device from being
moved.
Starting the Network
After all the devices have been connected to the network, you can turn everything on to begin testing to
make sure everything is operational. Most devices have lights that will indicate if the device detects
another device on the other end of the cable. This will be your first indication that the network is
operating properly.
Once the systems are running and Windows is fully booted up, you will need to configure your systems
to participate on the same network. By default, they dont know where to look for other systems when
they are a part of a network. It is our job to point them in the right direction.
19
Network Hardware
Chapter 3
Network Software
Network Hardware
20
Configuring Windows for Networking

This manual will cover installation in Windows 2000 as well as Windows XP. Windows 98 is not
covered due to it no longer being supported by Microsoft. It is recommended that the operating system
of the POS terminals be upgraded if Windows 98 is installed.
Windows 2000
The first thing to do in Windows 2000 to prepare the system for communications over the network is to
change the workgroup name and computer name. This can be any name you wish. Most of the time the
restaurant name is used or an abbreviation of the name. The default workgroup name is
WORKGROUP which can also be used if desired. Computer names are usually Server, POS1, POS2,
POS3, BAR, etc.
To change the workgroup name:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Right click on My Computer on the desktop. This will bring up a set of options to choose
from.
Select Properties. This will bring you into the Properties page of My Computer.
Click on the tab named Network Identification. This will bring you to the tab where
network settings can be changed.
Click on the button named Properties. This will bring you to the page where the workgroup
can be changed as well as the computer name. You should only change one setting at a time to
avoid any complications while the new settings are taking affect.
Change the workgroup name to your desired name.
Click OK.
When the system prompts to restart, accept and allow the system to restart.
To change the computer name:

1.
Follow the steps above and change the Computer Name field in step 4.
21
Network Hardware
The next step to preparing Windows 2000 is to change the IP address of the system to one that will be
on the same network or subnet as the other systems. There are many network configurations you can
have but for this example, we will use one that is very common in simple networks.
The range of IP addresses that are commonly used for simple networking are 192.168.0.1 thru
192.168.0.255. Most installations will only need a handful in this range and usually start at 192.168.0.1
assigned to the server computer.
To change the IP address of Windows 2000:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Start on the desktop.

Navigate to the Settings icon in the menu.
Navigate and click on the Network and Dial-up Connections icon.
Click on the Local Area Connection icon. This will bring up the Local Area Connection
Status page.
5. Click on the Properties button. This will bring you to the Local Area Connection Properties
page.
6. Highlight the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item in the white box. The properties button should
become active.
7. Click on the Properties button. This will bring you to the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties page.
8. Click Use the following IP address:. This will activate the fields below the setting enabling
you to edit them.
9. In the IP address field, type in the IP address you wish to use for this system. e.g. 192.168.0.1
10. If you hit the Tab key on the keyboard, you should see the Subnet mask field
automatically enter in a subnet mask that it thinks you will need. Usually this is correct.
The rest of the settings are optional and are usually only used in more complex networks or if you want
all the systems in your network to connect to the internet. Your ISP should be able to assist in setting
this up if needed. It is recommended that all you systems are connected to the internet so that Aldelo
Support can remotely connect to them for assistance.
Continue the steps above for each of the stations in the network. At each station, you should increment
the IP address by 1. For example, at the server computer you might have used 192.168.0.1. For
POS1 you will use 192.168.0.2 and POS2 you will use 192.168.0.3 and so on. Continue this until all
stations have IP addresses assigned. Remember to make sure there is a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0
on each station. This is the default address and should be ok to keep.
Network Hardware
22
Windows XP Pro
Windows XP comes in two flavors. They are Windows XP Home and Windows XP Pro. In a business
environment it is a good idea to use the pro edition since this is what it was meant for. There are many
features in Windows XP Pro that make setting up a network and configuring network settings much
easier. Windows XP Home lacks some of the tools necessary to do a clean installation of Aldelo For
Restaurants.
To change the workgroup name:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click Start
Navigate to the My Computer icon and right click on it. This will bring up a set of options
to choose from.
Navigate and click on the Properties option at the bottom of the list. This will bring up the
System Properties page.
Click on the Computer Name tab. This will bring you to the page where your network
settings can be changed.
Click on the Change button. This will bring you to the Computer Name Changes page
where you can change the computer name and workgroup name.
Change the workgroup name to your desired name.
Click OK.
When the system prompts to restart, accept and allow the system to be restarted.
To change the computer name:

1.
Follow the steps above and change the Computer Name field in step 5.
23
Network Hardware
To change the IP address of Windows XP:

1.
2.

Navigate to the Control Panel icon in the menu. This will bring you to the Control Panel
where many system setting can be changed.
3. Click on the Network Connections icon.
4. Click on the Local Area Connection icon. This will bring up the Local Area Connection
Status page.
5. Click on the Properties button. This will bring you to the Local Area Connection Properties
page.
6. Highlight the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item in the white box. The properties button should
become active.
7. Click on the Properties button. This will bring you to the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Properties page.
8. Click Use the following IP address:. This will activate the fields below the setting enabling
you to edit them.
9. In the IP address field, type in the IP address you wish to use for this system. e.g. 192.168.0.1
10. If you hit the Tab key on the keyboard, you should see the Subnet mask field
automatically enter in a subnet mask that it thinks you will need. Usually this is correct.
Testing Your Network

Now that you have configured the network, youre ready to test to see if the network is operational.
There are two tests that you can perform. The first test is to use the Ping command in MS DOS. Click
on the Start button now, and then select the RUN option. Now type Command in the open field of
the Run dialog screen. You will now see the MS DOS screen appear. Go ahead and type in PING
w.x.y.z, where wxyz is the IP address of another computer that you have specified earlier in the setup.
For example, if you want to test the server computer from one of the other POS stations, use ping
192.168.0.1 then press the Return key on the keyboard to issue the command. Wait and see if there are
any replies. Also, check out the Packet Loss information, this value should be zero to denote that your
network is successfully configured. If your Ping results returned failures, check your cabling and
settings. If the problem remains, you will need to consult with a qualified network technician to check
out your problem.
Although the network setup and configuration procedures are quite simple, an experienced computer
technician may be able to help you set up the network faster. So, if you have any doubts as to the
installation of the network, then it may be beneficial to have a qualified technician around to assist you
or complete the job for you.
Also, the Windows network installation help information should be referenced during your network
configuration if you should have any questions. Windows XP also has a Network Installation Wizard
that might be helpful in assisting with the network configuration portion.
POS Hardware Setup
Chapter 4
POS Hardware Setup
24
25
POS Hardware Setup
Setting up the Terminal

With All-In-One terminals, the setup should be very straight forward. Terminal manufacturers usually
install everything for you before they ship the product. This includes the touch screen drivers, MSR
drivers, customer display drivers, etc. If you need assistance with installing drivers for the terminal, the
manufacturer should be able to assist with the installation.
If you are using a touch screen separate from the computer, you will need to install the touch screen
drivers as well as attaching the hardware itself to the computer. For instructions on how to do this, refer
to the manufacturer documentation.
Setting up the POS Printers

Before you will be able to start printing receipts from Aldelo for Restaurants, you will need to set up the
printers in the Windows Printer Folder first. Just like most other Windows based programs, Aldelo
for Restaurants also communicates with the Windows Printer Spool for management of the print jobs.
The reason for this is to allow a print job to be redirected to another available printer if the printer
currently trying to print the receipt is out of paper or cannot print for any reason. When this happens
you will receive a message in the system telling you the printer is unavailable and will then allow you to
print to different printer.
Note: The print redirect will only work if ALL the systems are 2000/XP.
You will need to setup each of the printers that you wish to access from this current computer station.
This includes a network printer resource or a locally attached printer. The following are steps to adding
your printer to the Windows Printer Folder.
POS Hardware Setup
26
Windows 2000
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click the Start button located on your Windows taskbar.

Navigate to and click on the Settings icon.
Navigate to and click on Printers. This will bring you to the Printers page where all your
installed printers should be displayed.
Click on Add Printer. This will bring you to the Add Printer Wizard.
Follow the wizard to install either a local printer or a network printer. Local Printers are
printers that are physically attached to the station you are currently working on. Network
printers are printers attached to the network by being attached to a computer that is on the
network. You will need to make sure you have the correct driver from the manufacturer
available if the wizard prompts for it.
Near the completion of the wizard, you will be prompted to print a test page. Be sure to print
the test page to make sure that you have installed the printer successfully.
Tech Tip: If you absolutely cannot get the drivers from the printer manufacturer, you
can use the Generic Text Printer Drivers in Windows as a temporary replacement but it
is recommended that the correct drivers be installed as soon as possible. The
functionality of your computer will be the same although we cannot guarantee the
printer will function as it would with the proper driver installed.
Sharing Printers in Windows 2000

If other computers on the same network will use this printer, after the installation is complete, you need
to turn on its printer sharing feature. Below are the steps required to complete this task.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on the Start button on the Windows desktop.

Navigate to and click on Settings
Navigate and click on Printers. This will bring you to the Printers page.
Right click on the printer you wish to share. This will bring up a menu of options.
Click on Properties at the bottom of the menu. This will bring up the properties of the
printer.
6. Click on the tab named Sharing. This will bring you to the page where you can change the
sharing settings as well as install additional drivers for other operating systems that will be
using this printer over the network.
7. Click the Share As option. This will enable the field next to it where you can enter a share
name for the printer.
8. Change the share name to something that is meaningful such as Kitchen1 or Bar1.
9. Click Apply
10. Click OK
27
POS Hardware Setup
Windows XP Pro
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click the Start button located on your Windows taskbar.

Navigate to and click on the Control Panel icon.
Navigate to and click on Printers and Faxes. This will bring you to the Printers page where
all your installed printers should be displayed.
Click on Add Printer in the Printer Tasks menu on the top-left side of the screen. This will
bring you to the Add Printer Wizard.
Follow the wizard to install either a local printer or a network printer. Local Printers are
printers that are physically attached to the station you are currently working on. Network
printers are printers attached to the network by being attached to a computer that is on the
network. You will need to make sure you have the correct driver from the manufacturer
available if the wizard prompts for it.
Near the completion of the wizard, you will be prompted to print a test page. Be sure to print
the test page to make sure that you have installed the printer successfully.
Tech Tip: If you absolutely cannot get the drivers from the printer manufacturer, you
can use the Generic Text Printer Drivers in Windows as a temporary replacement but it
is recommended that the correct drivers be installed as soon as possible. The
functionality of your computer will be the same although we cannot guarantee the
printer will function as it would with the proper driver installed.
Sharing Printers in Windows XP Pro
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on the Start button on the Windows desktop.

Navigate to and click on Control Panel
Navigate and click on Printers and Faxes. This will bring you to the Printers page.
Right click on the printer you wish to share. This will bring up a menu of options.
printer.
6. Click on the tab named Sharing. This will bring you to the page where you can change the
sharing settings as well as install additional drivers for other operating systems that will be
using this printer over the network.
7. Click the Share As option. This will enable the field next to it where you can enter a share
name for the printer.
8. Change the share name to something that is meaningful such as Kitchen1 or Bar1.
9. Click Apply.
10. Click OK.
POS Hardware Setup
28
Testing the POS Printers

Once you have installed all your printers in Windows, you will need to test to make sure that all
computers can print to all the printers attached to the network. Remember that each system in the
network must have all the printers installed in the Printers folder.
For example, if you have 3 systems each with a printer attached, you will need to make sure those 3
printers show up in each of the 3 systems Printers folder. One for the local printer connected directly to
the machine and two that are installed as network printers since they are connected to other machines on
the network.
To test the printers on all the stations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Navigate to the Printers folder in either Windows 2000 or XP Pro.

Right click on the printer you wish to test. This will bring up a menu with a set of options to
choose from.
printer.
Click on Print Test Page. This will send a print job to the printer you are current working
with.
Repeat steps 2 thru 4 for each of the printers in the Printers folder. Make sure each of the test
pages print correctly.
If you encounter any issues with printing a test page, you may want to contact the manufacturer of the
printer to get assistance on correcting the issue.
29
POS Hardware Setup
Setting up the Cash Drawer

Printer Driven
Most cash drawers these days are connected to the printer by a 4 wire cable resembling a phone cable.
Make sure you have the correct cable for the drawer and that the drawer is compatible with the printer
you will be connecting it to. Call the manufacturer of the cash drawer if you are not sure.
If the cable is permanently connected to the cash drawer, connect the other end of the cable into the
cash drawer port of the printer. These are usually labeled and easily identified by the shape of the port.
Once you have the drawer connected to the printer, there should be instructions on how to open the cash
drawer through a DOS command. If you do not have these instructions, the manufacturer should be
able to provide these for you.
Serial
If you have a serial cash drawer, the setup is very similar to most other serial device installations. The
cash drawer should have a power cable as well as a serial cable to connect to the computer.
Make sure to power down your system before installing any serial device.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect the serial cable to the cash drawer as well as the computer.
Connect the power to the cash drawer.
Turn on the computer.
Once the system is up and running, you should be able to open a DOS command box and issue
commands to open the drawer. Refer to the manufacturer for these instructions.
POS Hardware Setup
30
Setting up the Customer Display

Installing customer displays are very similar to install a serial cash drawer. You should have a power
cable and a serial cable to connect the customer display to the computer. Once you have the device
connected, you should be able to run some tests through DOS to ensure the device is working properly.
One setting you will want to make note of with the customer display is what command set it is currently
using. The default command set that Aldelo For Restaurants uses is the UTC command set. If your
customer display does not support this command set, you should make sure you have all the commands
for the command set that the customer display does support. With this information, it will be possible
to configure Aldelo For Restaurants to use an alternate command set.
Tech Tip: Some customer displays will only allow you to install them on certain
COM ports due to some COM ports being powered COM ports instead of nonpowered. Check with the manufacturer of the customer display to see if this may be
the case.
Setting up the MICR Reader

This setup is very straight forward. The only MICR reader interface that Aldelo For Restaurants is
known to work with is the keyboard interface. To install the MICR on this interface, the MICR should
come with a Y splitter that allows you to connect the splitter into the computer and also allow the
keyboard and MICR device to connect to the splitter. If you do not want to install a keyboard at the
station, you can use what is called a keyboard terminator. These are fairly cheap devices that connect to
a keyboard interface and simulate a keyboard being present. If you do not have a keyboard or a
keyboard terminator installed, the MICR will not work.
31
POS Hardware Setup
Setting up the MSR Reader

Keyboard
To install a keyboard interface MSR, you can follow the same steps as described in the MICR setup.
Connect the splitter to the computer or terminal, connect the MSR reader to the splitter, and connect
either a keyboard or keyboard terminator to the splitter. To test if it is working, open up Notepad in
Windows and swipe a card through the MSR reader. If you see data written in Notepad, then the device
is working.
Serial
To install a serial interface MSR reader, you will follow the same general steps as any other serial
device.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Power down the system

Connect serial cable from the MSR reader to a COM port on the computer or terminal.
Make sure that if the device has a power cord that it is plugged in and working.
Start the computer or terminal
To test the device, you might need to install drivers that came with the MSR reader. Refer to the
manufacturer for instructions on how to test the device in Windows.
POS Hardware Setup
32
Setting up the Barcode Reader

Currently, the keyboard interface barcode scanner is supported by Aldelo For Restaurants. To install
this device, you will follow the same instructions as many other keyboard interface devices. Install a
splitter cable and then connecting the barcode scanner as well as the keyboard or keyboard terminator to
the splitter.
Setting up the Coin Changer

Currently the USB version of the coin changer is supported. If you are using Aldelo For Restaurants,
all you will need to do is plug the coin changer into any available USB port on the computer or
terminal. There is also a power plug that will need to be attached to the coin changer.
Setting up Caller ID
Modem
The first type of Caller ID device is the modem. These can be internal or external. Many modems
these days come with Caller ID functions. Since there many modem manufacturers today, the best
thing to do is to refer to the manufacturers instructions on how to install the modem. Internal modems
require a card to be added to the computer and external modems require an open serial port or USB
port. USB modems have not been tested with Aldelo For Restaurants and should not be used unless
they can map to a COM port on the computer and will work in HyperTerminal.
Multi-Line Caller ID Device
If you need more than 1 line for incoming calls, you will want to install a multi-line Caller ID box.
Aldelo For Restaurants has support for many models and can add more if needed. To install these
devices, you should have the serial cable that came with the device as well as the power adapter.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Power down the computer or terminal

Connect the serial cable to the Caller ID device and to any available COM port on the
computer or terminal.
Connect the power cable to the device and turn on the device.
Connect any phone lines that you want to monitor caller information on. You may want to
label the lines so that you can have a reference if you need one.
Turn on the computer or terminal.
33
Part 2
Software Installation and

Configuration
Software Setup
Chapter 5
Software Setup
34
35
Software Setup
Installing Aldelo For Restaurants

Once you have your network and hardware setup, you can install the Aldelo For Restaurants software.
Make sure you have your CD handy and are able to either install using a CD-ROM drive on each
system or you can transfer the files from the CD onto a USB drive to take with you to each system in
the event that the systems do not have CD-ROM drives.
1.
If you are using the CD method of installing, you can place the CD into the CD-ROM drive
and it will automatically launch the splash screen.
2.
Select the software you wish to install. This will launch the installer for that particular
product.
Walk through the install wizard and make sure to read the EULA carefully as it has important
information you should know about the product licensing.
You will be presented with being able to install other tools that come with Aldelo For
Restaurants and it is recommended that you do so. These tools assist in maintaining the
database as well as other tools to help with language translation.
Congratulations! You have just successfully finished installing Aldelo For Restaurants.
3.
4.
5.
Software Setup
36
Adjusting Windows
Proper Screen Resolution
To efficiently operate your Aldelo for Restaurants software, we strongly recommend that you change
your Windows display settings to the suggestions mentioned below. You can still use Aldelo for
Restaurants with a different display configuration but for the best and most efficient results use the
suggested settings below.
In order for all of the screen components in Aldelo for Restaurants to fit properly, you must change the
screen resolution to 800 x 600 pixels. To do this:
1.
2.
3.
Right Click your mouse button anywhere on the desktop where there isnt an icon and then
with the left mouse button select Properties.
Click on the Settings tab and change the Screen Resolution to 800 x 600 pixels.
Click the Apply button.
16 Bit Color Palette or Better

Although not required, we do recommend that you set your color depth to 16 Bit or higher for better
graphics display on your computer. To do this:
1.
2.
3.
Right Click anywhere on the desktop where there isnt an icon and then with the left mouse
button select Properties.
Go to the Settings tab, and change the Color Quality, to 16 Bit or higher color.
37
Software Setup
Small Font 96 DPI

You will also need to make sure your computers font is set to Normal Size 96 DPI. To do this:
1.
2.
3.
Right Click anywhere on the desktop where there isnt an icon and then with the left mouse
button select Properties.
Choose the Settings tab and click the Advanced button to change the font size attribute.
Keep the Taskbar on Top of Other Windows

Taskbar option
By default the Windows Taskbar will be set so that it is
always on top and present. With Aldelo for Restaurants
it is much easier and safer to have the taskbar setting
Keep the taskbar on top of other windows unchecked.
Please refer to the following page for additional settings
that should be enabled for the task bar. To do this:
1.
2.
3.
Right Click on the Start button on the

Windows desktop.
Select the Taskbar tab.
Make sure the box that says Keep the Taskbar
on Top of Other Windows is NOT checked.
TIP: If you have trouble with the above configurations then you can have an experienced computer
technician do it or refer to the Windows Help.
Setting the Taskbar to Auto Hide
For ease of use and to ensure that you have the best possible display, you will need to set your
Windows Taskbar to Auto Hide. Setting the Taskbar to Auto Hide is also useful for keeping users
from launching other programs while using Aldelo for Restaurants. By doing this, whenever the mouse
cursor is NOT on the taskbar, then the taskbar will be hidden from view. Keep in mind, if the user has
access to a mouse they can get into Windows.
1.
2.
3.
Right Click on the Windows Taskbar then select Properties.

Check the Auto Hide check box.
Software Setup
38
Multiple Languages
Supported Language & Special Multilingual Capabilities
When using Microsoft Windows 2000/XP there is multilingual features in Aldelo for Restaurants that
can be configured with ease. Windows 2000/XP has native support for many languages and is lightyears ahead of Windows 95/98 in multi-language support.
Aldelo For Restaurants software currently supports English, Spanish, and Chinese languages for 100%
of the screen interfaces, both in the POS and Back Office sections. The fact that these languages are
listed as fully supported doesnt mean you cant translate the software yourself. Aldelo Systems Inc.
can supply a utility that will assist you in translating the software to whatever language you desire. This
is the Localization Manager Utility. This utility is installed with Aldelo For Restaurants. The use of
this utility will be discussed later in this manual.
In addition to supporting multiple languages, Aldelo For Restaurants also has the capability to specify
primary and secondary menu item and menu modifier names. With this capability, for example, you
can use the English equivalent of the menu or modifier name in the primary language field, and then use
the Spanish or another language equivalent in the secondary language field.
Now, you can toggle a switch in the system options (Explained in later chapters) to have the guest
receipt and screen output shown with primary language names, while the kitchen receives the secondary
language (i.e. Spanish) receipt print out. Kitchen staff and wait staff speaking different languages is no
longer a barrier, as the POS software will automatically allow the wait staff to enter their order in one
language, while the kitchen staff receives the order in another language of your selection. (Of course,
you will have to program the menu first for it to work!)
Another feature with our multilingual system is the Follow-Me language display capability. With
Follow-Me, when you login to the system, the screen interface will display in your preferred language
as you have specified in your employee settings. (Explained in later chapters) With this feature the
entire screen interface language will change to accommodate your language preference.
Additionally, Follow-Me will also let you define your menu and modifier name viewing options.
With this the employee will be able to view both the menu items and modifiers in the primary language
or secondary language. This way, if you have English in the primary language field of the menu item,
and Chinese in the secondary language field of the same menu item, then an employee who has
specified to view menu items in the secondary language, then he/she will see all the menu items or
modifiers shown in the secondary language. Remember if you are using a language other than English,
Spanish, and Chinese you will have to use the Localization Manager Utility to translate the software.
The secondary language field mentioned above CAN be used with any language but any other part of
the software will be in English, Spanish, or Chinese. If you are using Windows 2000 or XP, you will
have native Chinese support without the need for translation software. For help on setting this up,
please refer to the Windows help system. Follow-Me technology truly enables a restaurant with
different ethnic employees to work together and use the system with the language of their choice.
39
Software Setup
Language Settings in Windows 2000/XP

There may be times when you will want to enter in menu items in a language other than English. Some
restaurants want the menu items to print in the kitchen in Chinese or Spanish and in order to have them
print in Chinese or use Spanish characters; the symbols or characters must be entered in the software.
Windows 2000 and Windows XP have native support for Asian languages when symbols are needed.
Here we will go over how to setup the language settings in Windows 2000 and Windows XP. These
settings will need to be changed in order to view the software in the language of your choice as well.
Adding Chinese in Windows 2000
To add the Chinese language to Windows 2000, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have
the Windows 2000 CD available.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Click Start on the desktop. This will bring up the Start Menu.
Navigate to Settings and then Control Panel.
Click on Control Panel. This will bring up the Control Panel.
Double click on Regional Options. This will bring up the Regional Options screen.
In the Language settings for the system box, put a check in the Simplified Chinese or
Traditional Chinese box.
Click Apply. This will prompt you for the Windows 2000 CD.
Put the Windows 2000 CD in the tray and click OK. This will copy all the files needed for
this language and then ask for you to restart the system.
Restart the system.
Once the system is restarted, go back to Regional Options in Control Panel.
Click Set default This will bring up the Select System Locale screen.
Select the language of your choice.
Click OK.
Click the Input Locales tab. This will bring up the Input Locales language settings.
Click Add. This will bring up the Add Input Locale screen.
Select the language of your choice and the keyboard layout.
Click OK.
Software Setup
40
Adding Chinese in Windows XP

To add the Chinese language to Windows XP, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have the
Windows XP CD available.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Click Start on the desktop. This will bring up the Start Menu.
Navigate to Control Panel.
Click on Control Panel. This will bring up the Control Panel.
Double click on Regional and Language Options. This will bring up the Regional and
Language Options screen.
Click on the Languages tab. This will bring up the section to add the East Asian Languages.
Put a check in the box that says Install files for East Asian languages.
Click Apply. This will prompt you for the Windows XP CD.
Put the Windows XP CD in the tray and click OK This will copy all the files needed for this
language and then ask for you to restart the system.
Restart the system.
Once the system is restarted, go back to Regional and Language Options in Control Panel.
Click the Advanced tab. This will bring up the section for Language for non-Unicode
programs.
Select the language of your choice.
Click OK. Do not restart yet.
Click the Languages tab. This will bring up the Text services and input languages.
Click Details. This will bring up the Default input language settings.
Click Add.
Select the language of your choice and the keyboard layout.
Click OK.
Restart the system.
41
Software Setup
Spanish ALT codes

If you need to enter Spanish characters, you can use the codes Windows has provided. Simply hold
down the ALT key on the keyboard and type the number listed.
Punctuation
Lowercase
Capitals
ALT+0193
ALT+0225
ALT+0191
ALT+0201
ALT+0233
ALT+0161
ALT+0205
ALT+0211
ALT+0243
ALT+0218
ALT+0250
ALT+0209
ALT+0241
ALT+0220
ALT+0252
ALT+0237
ALT+0171 (Left
Angle Quote)
ALT+0187 (Right
Angle Quote)
ALT+0128
Adding a New Font to Windows.

If you need to display the language in another language other than what is list in windows or are having
troubles displaying your language, you may want to try installing a font that supports your language.
You can visit the internet and search for a font that will best suit your needs as there are hundreds of
different fonts to choose from. Once you find a font you are happy with, you can install it in Windows
under the Fonts icon in the Control Panel.
To install a font, go to File > Install New Font. This will take you to the font selection screen where
you will specify where the new font is located to be installed. Once the font is installed, make sure to
write the exact name of the font down for use in Aldelo For Restaurants. You will need to enter the
font name in Station Settings > General > System Language Settings. If you need to use another font
for receipts or reports, you will need to find a fixed width font. These are special fonts that allow set
column sizes used in printing.
Software Setup
42
Registering & Activating Aldelo For Restaurants

The very first time that you launch your software, it will be in Demo mode. If the demo expires you
will get a product registration window prompting you to enter your product registration and validation
key. To register your software and receive your validation key please register online or contact Aldelo
Systems by calling in at 209-533-3711. You can also send in a request for registration via email at
contact@Aldelo.com If you send in a request by email, please be sure to provide your serial
number, restaurant name, streets address, telephone number, city, state, zip code and the name
of the owner of the restaurant. The product registration is quite simple and quick. Just follow the
instructions below for a quick and easy registration.
In the Aldelo For Restaurants Product Registration window, enter your serial number, Restaurant
Name, Street address, and Telephone # EXACTLY as you want it printed on the guest receipt. It is
case and letter sensitive so be sure the info is totally correct (the street address should be just the
address, no city or zip should be entered). Be sure to enter the serial number including the dashes.
Locate the Dynamic License #. The Aldelo Support Technician will verify that it matches the
Dynamic License # we have on record.
Once your Dynamic License # matches the one we have on record, the technician will read you the
Validation Key. Enter this number in.
Click Register.
43
Software Setup
If the registration was successful you will get a message stating so. If not, verify if the dynamic license
#s match and your restaurant info is entered the same EXACT way that you registered it with Aldelo
Systems Inc. If you are still unsuccessful please contact Aldelo Systems Inc. for further assistance.
Repeat these steps for ALL of your computers running Aldelo for Restaurants. You will use the same
registration info and validation key for all the licenses.
If you ever need to change your restaurant telephone number or name, you MUST contact Aldelo
Systems Inc. so that your registration can be updated to reflect the change. If your restaurant ever
changes ownership or address you also MUST contact Aldelo Systems Inc. and a License Transfer
Agreement will have to be signed and a fee may need to be paid. These will need to be mailed in to
make it a legal change, so that the license can be registered again under the new information.
Internet Registration
If you have access to the internet, you can register your software within seconds. Click the Register
via Internet button to start the process. You will need your serial number on the back of the DVD case
to complete this process. You must also make sure you fill in the information you want printed on the
receipt. Do not use cell phone numbers, home addresses, or temporary names, addresses, or phone
numbers.
Software Activation
Once the software is registered, you will have 10 days to activate each station in the network. This is
added protection to ensure your copy of Aldelo For Restaurants is genuine. This will protect you from
piracy and people trying to sell the Aldelo For Restaurants product without a license.
To activate each station, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the Back Office and
have already registered the software.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Help in the menu bar. This will show a list of options.
Click Software Activation. This will bring up the software activation window.
Follow the instructions provided by the Aldelo Support Representative or click Activate Via
Internet.
a. Activation via the internet is the recommended option for activating your software.
This process is much faster and more convenient.
Repeat steps 1-3 for each station in your network.
If you cannot activate via the internet, you can also call in to activate each station.
Note: All registration information can be found in the Back Office > About. This will give the serial
number and license number.
Software Setup
44
Sharing the Database folder

In order for all stations to connect to the database, you will need to share the folder where the database
is located. Each operating system has different methods for sharing data so it is important to read the
section pertaining to your OS.
Sharing in Windows 2000
Sharing in Windows 2000 is straight forward and doesnt require a lot of effort when sharing with other
Windows 2000 machines.
To share a folder in Windows 2000
exit, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are the administrator on the machine.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Open up My Computer on the desktop

Click Tools in the menu bar. This will be located between Favorites and Help.
Navigate and click on Folder Options. This will bring up the Folder Options screen.
Click the View tab. This will bring up the screen where you can change advanced settings.
Click the Show hidden files and folders radio button in the Advanced Settings section.
a. This will show folders and files that are not normally shown
Click Apply.
Click OK. You should now see folders that look like they are a little transparent. These are
the folders that were hidden before.
Open up the C: drive in My Computer. This will bring up the folders available on the C
drive.
Follow the path of Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Aldelo
Systems\Aldelo Data\ This should bring you to the location where you will see the Aldelo For
Restaurants folder.
Right click the folder named Aldelo For Restaurants. This will give you a list of options to
choose from.
Navigate to and click on Sharing. This will bring up the section where you can share the
folder and set permissions.
Click the Share this folder radio button. This will enable the ability all the fields needed to
share the folder.
Change the share name to Aldelo to keep it compatible with Windows 98.
Click the Permissions button. This will bring up the ACL (Access Control List) for the
share permissions of this folder.
Make sure that the group Everyone has Allow / Full Control permissions. If you require
different permissions, you will have to consult with your network administrator to configure
this.
Click Apply.
Click OK
Click the Security tab. This will show the ACL for the folder security permissions. These
are different from share permissions and also need to be set.
45
Software Setup
19. Make sure the Everyone group has Allow / Modify permissions. If you require different
permissions, you will have to consult with your network administrator to configure this.
20. Click Apply.
21. Click OK.
Sharing in Windows XP Home

Sharing in Windows XP Home is a little different than Windows 2000 or Windows XP Pro. The reason
for this is because Microsoft does not allow the user to see folder security permissions. To be able to
change the security permissions on a folder, you will either have to boot the computer into SafeMode as
an administrator, or change the permissions from the command line. Since SafeMode is a more
advanced technique, we will use the command line to change the permissions.
To share a folder in Windows XP Home, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are the
administrator on the machine.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Follow steps 1- 10 in the Windows 2000 folder sharing steps. This will show the hidden
folders on the system and get you to a point where Windows 2000 and Windows XP differ.
Navigate to and click on Sharing and Security. This will bring up the sharing properties of
the folder.
Put a check in the Share this folder on the network box. This will enable the sharing options
for this folder.
Type the name Aldelo in the Share name field.
Put a check in the Allow network users to change my files box.
Click Apply.
Click OK.
Navigate to and click Run.
Type cmd in the run field and press Enter on the keyboard. This will bring up the command
prompt.
In the command prompt, type [cd \] without the brackets and press Enter.
Type [cacls "C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Aldelo Systems\Aldelo
Data\Aldelo For Restaurants" /T /G Everyone:F Users:F System:F] without the brackets and
press Enter.. You will need to include the quotes in this command.
This will enable the proper security permissions for the shared folder.
Software Setup
46
Sharing in Windows XP Professional

Sharing in Windows XP Pro is almost the same as sharing in Windows 2000. The only difference is
that folder security is hidden by default.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
22.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Open up My Computer on the desktop

Click Tools in the menu bar. This will be located between Favorites and Help.
Navigate and click on Folder Options. This will bring up the Folder Options screen.
Click the View tab. This will bring up the screen where you can change advanced settings.
Click the Show hidden files and folders radio button in the Advanced Settings section.
a. This will show folders and files that are not normally shown
UNCHECK the Use simple file sharing (Recommended) box.
a. This will allow the security tab to be shown when sharing a folder.
Click Apply.
Click OK. You should now see folders that look like they are a little transparent. These are
the folders that were hidden before.
Open up the C: drive in My Computer. This will bring up the folders available on the C
drive.
Follow the path of Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Aldelo
Systems\Aldelo Data\ This should bring you to the location where you will see the Aldelo For
Restaurants folder.
Right click the folder named Aldelo For Restaurants. This will give you a list of options to
choose from.
Navigate to and click on Sharing and Security. This will bring up the section where you can
share the folder and set permissions.
Click the Share this folder radio button. This will enable the ability all the fields needed to
share the folder.
Change the share name to Aldelo to keep it compatible with Windows 98.
Click the Permissions button. This will bring up the ACL (Access Control List) for the
share permissions of this folder.
Make sure that the group Everyone has Allow / Full Control permissions. If you require
different permissions, you will have to consult with your network administrator to configure
this.
Click Apply.
Click OK
Click the Security tab. This will show the ACL for the folder security permissions. These
are different from share permissions and also need to be set.
Make sure the Everyone group has Allow / Modify permissions. If you require different
permissions, you will have to consult with your network administrator to configure this.
Click Apply.
Click OK.
47
Software Setup
Selecting a Database
After the registration process you will be prompted to select your startup database file if you have not
already done so. You will see that there are 3 choices. One of these choices is Start With Demo
Database. You will select this choice if you would like to start using the pre-programmed demo
database. It is also a good idea to check this box if you are not yet familiar with configuring or using
Aldelo for Restaurants. Do not use the demo database to build your menu. This database is for demo
purposes only and is removed when the software is uninstalled.
Your next option is to Create A New Blank Database. Select this choice if you would like to begin
creating your own database specific to your Restaurant. When you select this option you will be
prompted to enter the name of your restaurant. This will also be the name of the folder and database
file kept on your computer. Remember what you use for the name as it may be needed in the future for
troubleshooting purposes. Again do not build your database on top of the Demo database. If you do
and you uninstall your application, you database will be deleted.
The last choice is the I Will Select My Own Database. You will select this choice if you have already
created a database you would like to link to.
Another option on this screen is Always Connect To This Database. You will click this box if the
database you are selecting will be the database you will be using every time you start Aldelo for
Restaurants. More than likely, you will want to check this box unless you are just using a database
temporarily.
If the software cannot find the database defined in the registry, it will ask you if you want to clear the
registry so that you can select the database manually.
If you would like to manually edit the database location in the registry, follow the instructions below.
1.
2.
3.
Click on Start on the Windows desktop. Click on Run and type in regedit.
This will bring up the registry editor. Go to HKEY_CURRENT_USER > Software > VB and
VBA Program Settings > Aldelo For Restaurants > Version 3.
Find the Registry Keys named Data Source and Forced Data Source.
Software Setup
48
Creating a Database
When you start the software for the first time, you will most likely want to play with the demo database.
Once you have a good feel for how you use the software, you will want to get started creating your own
database. Do not use the demo database as a starting point. If you want to use items from the demo
database, export them and import them into your new database. Demo databases are deleted when the
software is uninstalled.
To create a new database, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the database selection
screen. This screen has three options. Start with Demo Database, Create a New Blank Database, or I
Will Select My Own Database.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Click on Create a New Blank Database.

Click Continue. This will prompt you for the name of the database.
a. Only enter the name. You do not need to enter the .mdb extension or the path of the
database.
Click OK. This will bring up a series of prompts for required information.
Enter the information as requested.
Once completed, you will be shown the Store Settings and the Station Settings. You do not
have to set anything yet and you can click Done to skip past these pages.
Once you are in the Back Office, click Setup.
Navigate to and click Employee Setup.
Navigate to and click Employee Files. This will bring up the Employee Files screen.
Create an Employee File for yourself and make sure you fill in and remember your access
code. Give yourself a security level 5 to ensure you can navigate the system without
restrictions.
This database will be created in the directory of:

C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Aldelo Systems\Aldelo Data\Aldelo For
Restaurants\Databases\Live\[database name as folder name]\[database name].
Connecting to a Database over the Network
When you have your database ready for other machines to connect to, make sure you have already setup
the sharing permissions discussed earlier. This will cover connecting to the database over the network
in Windows XP. It is very similar to Windows 2000 and these instructions can be followed for that OS
as well.
To connect to a database on another computer, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have
completed the folder sharing successfully and have tested to make sure you have access to the database.
1.
2.
3.
On a client machine, go to the Back Office of Aldelo For Restaurants.

Click on Data Source. This will bring up the warning for switching databases.
Click Yes after reading the warning. This will bring up the Database Selection screen.
49
Software Setup
4.
5.
6.
Click I Will Select My Own Database.

Click Always Connect To This Database.
Click Continue. This will bring up the Open File dialog box.
7.
Find and click on My Network Places. This will display all the items under the My Network
Places object.
Double click on Entire Network. This will bring up some options for the network.
Double click on Microsoft Windows Network. This will bring up all the workgroups in the
network. Most of the time this is just one.
Double click on the workgroup name. This will bring up a list of computers in the workgroup.
Double click on the computer name that has the database stored on it. This will bring up a list
of shared folders on that system.
Double click the Aldelo folder. This will bring up a list of folders in this shared folder.
a. This is assuming you have followed the naming convention recommended in the
folder sharing section of this manual.
Double click on the Databases folder.
Double click on the Live folder.
Double click on the folder with your database name as the folder name.
Double click on the file with the database name.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
This will start the process of settings this system up on the database. You will be prompted with the
Station Settings screen. You can click Done to skip this and come back to it later. It is recommended
that you check to make sure that the selected database is correct and that all information is correct.
Software Setup
50
Information Data Entry

This section will go over all the data entry and needs to be completed before using the software for the
first time. The easiest way to complete this section is to follow along in the software and fill in each
field after you have read the explanation. If you need to find a screen in the software while you are
following along, directions to the screen being explained will be provided to you in the format of
Screen 1 > Screen 2 > Screen 3 > Screen 4
General Settings
Postal Codes
Description: The purpose of this screen is to maintain all the postal codes that your restaurant will
service.
Screen location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Postal Codes.
City:
This is where you will enter the city associated with this postal code.
State:
This is where you will enter the state associated with this postal code.
Postal Code:
This is the postal code associated with the city and state.
Delivery Charge:
This will be the delivery charge that will be applied when this postal code is
used.
Delivery
Compensation:
This is where you will specify the amount of money the driver will get for
compensation while delivering.
51
Software Setup
Delivery Streets
Description: The purpose of this screen is to maintain all the streets that your restaurant will service
during deliveries.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Delivery Streets.
Street Name:
In this field you will enter the name of the street that you are defining
Address From:
In this field you will enter the first address on this street that delivery is offered.
Address To:
In this field you will enter the last address on this street that delivery is offered.
Map Code:
In this field you will enter a code for the street that you are defining (the code is
created by the user). The map code will be the code on a map on the wall that
defines where a location is. For example, wall maps have codes on them telling
you where locations are on the map. These are codes like B3 or D2. You can
enter those codes into the software for each address so when you call up and
address, it will say B3 and you will look on the wall map and see where B3 is
located.
Delivery
Charge:
In this field you will enter the amount of money that your restaurant that will
charge for delivery on this street.
Delivery
Compensation:
In this field you will enter the amount of money that you will give to your driver
for deliveries made on this street.
Postal Code:
This is the postal code where this street is located
No Delivery:
This option is used when your restaurant does not want to offer delivery to this
street.
Software Setup
52
Cash Trays
Description: The purpose of this screen is to maintain all the cash trays (drawers) for your restaurant.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Cash Trays.
Cash Tray
ID:
This is the ID number the software assigned to this cash drawer.
Cash Tray
Name:
This field allows you to give this cash tray a name such as AM Bar for the Bar working
the AM Shift. This will not show up when you are selecting the cash tray in the Main
POS screen.
Hide Cash
Tray:
This option will hide the cash drawer from users in the Main POS screen.
Surcharges
Description: The purpose of this screen is to maintain all the surcharges that are applicable in your
restaurant.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Surcharges.
Surcharge ID:
This is the ID number the software assigns the Surcharge.
Surcharge
Name:
This field allows you to assign a name to this surcharge. This can be any name
you wish.
Surcharge
Amount:
This field allows you to enter the amount of the surcharge. This number will be a
dollar amount or percent.
Amount Basis:
This drop down menu will allow you to select which type of surcharge this is.
This can be Currency meaning a dollar amount or Percent, which is percentage
based.
Waiver Min.
Check
This field allows you to specify the dollar amount the ticket needs to be to waive
the surcharge.
Surcharge
Description:
This field allows you to enter in a description explaining what this surcharge is
used for.
Hide Surcharge:
This will hide this surcharge when its no longer used.
53
Software Setup
Discounts
Description: The purpose of this screen is to maintain all discounts that can be used in your restaurant.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Discounts.
Discount ID:
This is the ID the software assigns this discount.
Discount
Name:
This field allows you to assign a name to this discount. This can be any name you
wish.
Discount
Amount:
This field allows you to enter the amount of the discount. This number will be a
dollar amount or percent.
Amount
Basis:
This drop down menu allows you to select the basis on which this discount will be
used. This can be Percent, Currency, or Maximum Amount Charged. Maximum
Amount Charged will only work with menu items and not the entire order.
Discount
Expire Date:
This field allows you to specify a date on which this discount will expire
Min Ticket
For Discount:
This field allows you to specify an amount the ticket needs to be before a discount can
be given.
Discount
Group
Definition:
This feature is used for discounting grouped menu items. To enable this feature you
must have created this discount using the Maximum Amount Charged amount basis.
If you have a hamburger, fries, and a coke and you can discount the group as a whole.
To set this up you must first assign a Menu Group Number to each menu item in your
menu. This is on page 2 of the menu item editor. An example of this is to assign a 1
to all hamburgers, and a 2 to all fries, while a 3 would be on all your drinks. Now
return to the Discount that was setup and find the three dots under this field. Click on
the three dots to bring up three consecutive keypads. The first is where you will
define the group number of the item in this Discount Group. The next is the number
of items that will be allowed when applying this discount. The last is the maximum
amount that the discount will allow on this item before adding additional charges.
Repeat this for every menu item that this Discount will be used for.
Software Setup
54
Hide
Discount:
This option will hide this discount if it is not used anymore.
Exclude Bar
Drinks:
This option will not discount menu items that are marked as bar drinks.
Discount
Barcode:
This field will allow a barcode number to be entered for this discount. If you have the
barcode made for the discount already, all you have to do is place the cursor in this
field and scan the barcode.
Menu Item
To
Discount:
This option allows you to define which menu item the discount will be applied to when
the discount is scanned using the barcode feature. For example if you have 9 items on a
ticket and you scan the discount for cheese pizza it will search for the cheese pizza on
the ticket and discount every instance of that item. This is useful if you have specials
for certain items and you want to save time.
Bank Card Files

Description: The purpose of this dialog box is to let you maintain a list of bankcard files that you may
associate for the bad checks that you may receive during operations.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Bank Card Files.
Bank Name:
This field allows you to enter a bank name
Phone Number:
This field allows you to enter a phone number for the bank
Verify Funds By Phone:
This option is reserved for future use.
Hide Bank Card File:
This will hide this bank card file when it is no longer used.
Bad Check Reasons

Description: The purpose of this dialog box is to let you maintain a list of bad check reasons for
association with bad checks that you may receive during your operations.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Bad Check Reasons.
Bad Check
Reason:
This field allows you to enter a reason the check received from the customer was
bad.
Hide Reason:
If this reason is no longer a reason for a bad check then you will want to put a
check in this check box.
55
Software Setup
Bad Check Penalties
Description: The purpose of this dialog window is to let you maintain a list of bad check penalties that
you may associate with the bad checks that you may receive during your operations.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Bad Check Penalties.
Bad Check Penalties:
This field allows you to enter a name for the bad check penalty.
Penalty Amount:
This field allows you to enter the amount of money the customer will be
charged for this penalty.
Hide Penalty:
This option allows you to hide the penalty when it is no longer used.
Software Setup
56
Custom Printer Types

Description: The purpose of this feature is to let you define your own custom printer types if they are
not already supported in the software. This gives you the capability of supporting any POS receipt
printer that you know the Escape Control Codes for. You will need to refer to your printers user
manual for the Escape Control Codes and convert them into our coding method.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Bad Check Penalties.
Based on This
Printer:
This drop down field lets you choose the type of printer that this custom printer will
be based on
Printer Type
Name:
This field allows you to enter the name you choose for this printer. The name of
your printer can be anything that you want it to be you could even name it after
yourself if you wanted to.
Bold Font
Code:
This field allows you to enter your printers code for Bold Font.
Non-Bold Font
Code:
This field allows you to enter your printers code for the Font that is not bold.
Large Font
Code:
This field allows you to enter your printers code for Large Font.
Small Font
Code:
This field allows you to enter your printers code for Small Font.
Red Font Code:
This field allows you to enter your printers code for Red Font.
Non-Red Font
Code:
This field allows you to enter your printers code for Non-Red Font
Cash Drawer
Code:
This field allows you to enter your printers code for opening the Printer Driven
Cash Drawer if your printer supports Printer Driven Cash Drawers.
Line Feed
Code:
This field allows you to enter your printers code for Line Feed.
57
Software Setup
Auto Cut
Code:
This field allows you to enter your printers code for automatically cutting off the
paper when the printer is done printing, if your printer supports Auto Cutting.
Buzzer Code:
This field allows you to enter your printers code for the buzzer that goes off when
the printer is done printing; if your printer has a buzzer that goes off, otherwise leave
this field blank.
Small Font
Columns:
This field allows you to enter the number of Small Font Characters that you can have
per one line on your printer.
Large Font
Columns:
This field allows you to enter the number of Large Font Characters that you can have
per one line on your printer.
How To Convert Control Codes

The fields in the custom printer types are coded in a different method than the actual codes that you will
get out of your printers user manual. You will need to convert your control codes to the softwares
method of coding. Below is an explanation of how to convert these codes.
The fields in the Custom Printer Types are coded for the decimal values. If your printer control code
for line feed is LF, which is 10 in decimal value, format it to three digits, and then precede it with the
capital character C. For example, LF will actually be entered in the Line Feed field as C010. Same
idea applies to printer control codes that have multiple word combinations, such as ESC p. Simply
figure out the converted code for ESC, and then figure out the converted code for p, and put them
together in the field that they apply to. This would convert to C027C112.
58
Software Setup
Code Conversion Chart
Below is a chart that will make converting the codes much easier.
Character
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
SP
!
#
$
%
HEX
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
DECIMAL
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
Character
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
a
b
c
d
e
f
HEX
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
DECIMAL
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
59
Software Setup
&
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
del
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
Software Setup
60
Table Setup
Dine In Table Groups
Description: The purpose of this screen is to specify the sections or table groups that your
establishment has. There are up to 10 groups that can be added. If a group is not added, it will not
show up on the table selection screen. This step must be done before any tables can be created.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Table Setup > Dine In Table Groups.
Table
Group No.
#
This field will specify the name of the table group.
Add:
This button will add a new table group if one has not already been specified for this
number.
Edit:
This button will edit a table group that has already been created.
Delete:
This button will delete a table group that has already been created. You cannot delete a
table group that has tables assigned to it. You must first assign these tables to another
group before deleting the target table group.
61
Software Setup
Table Group Editor
Description: The purpose of this screen is to edit a table group you have already created.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Table Setup > Dine In Table Groups > Edit.
Table Group
Name:
This field will specify the name of the table group.
Group 1 Name:
This field will specify the name of the first group that tips will be shared with. A
good example is Hostess.
Group 1
Percent:
This field will specify the percent of tips that will be shared with this group.
Group 2 Name:
This field will specify the name of the first group that tips will be shared with. A
good example is Bus Person.
Group 2
Percent:
This field will specify the percent of tips that will be shared with this group.
Tech Tip: In order to see the Table Group Tip Sharing fields, you will have to enable
the option in Back Office > Other > Enable Table Group Tip Sharing.
Software Setup
62
Dine In Tables
Description: The purpose of this screen is to create, edit, assign and arrange tables in each of the table
groups defined.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Table Setup > Dine In Tables.
Assign Table:
This drop down list will specify the employee you wish to assign tables to at this time.
If there are no tables assigned to this employee, you will not see any tables that are
green or red. Green means the table is assigned to this person and red means the table
is assigned to someone else in the list and is not available for assignment.
Table
Groups:
This drop down list specifies the current table group you are working in. This list is
generated from the table groups that have already been defined.
Assign Table
[Name], [Job
Title]:
This button will assign tables that have been selected. Tables must be selected first
before clicking this button.
Clear Table:
This button will clear all table assignments.
Table Grid
Button:
These buttons represent tables that can be created or tables that have been created.
Tables that have been created will have a name associated to them. Tables that are
still new are blank.
Tech Tip: If you want to quickly move your tables around, you can right click and
drag and drop the table to a new position.
63
Software Setup
Dine In Table Editor
Description: The purpose of this screen is to create and edit specific properties of a table.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Table Setup > Dine In Tables > Table
Dine In Table Name:
This field will specify the table name.
Total Seats (12 Max For

Visual Seating):
This field will specify the number of people that can sit at this table.
Reservations cannot be made for more people than this number specifies.
Average Table Usage

Minutes:
This field will specify the number of minutes a table is usually occupied
for. This is used when creating reservations.
Picture:
This will specify the icon of the table.
Smoking Section:
This option will specify if this table is a smoking table.
Near Windows:
This option will specify if this table is near a window.
Booth Seating:
This option will specify if this table is a booth.
Private Seating:
This option will specify if this table is in a private area.
Hibachi Table
This option will specify if this table is a Japanese hibachi table.
Hibachi Table Style:
This drop down list will specify which direction this table faces.
Hibachi Left, Top,

Bottom, Right Side Seats:
This drop down list will specify how many people can sit on each side.
Hibachi Can Bridge To:
This option will specify which table can be connected to this hibachi
table.
Hibachi Bridge Seats:
This option will specify how many seats are created as a result of the
bridging.
Software Setup
64
Employee Setup
Job Titles
Description: The purpose of this screen is to let you define the job titles that your restaurant will have.
You will want to be sure to create as many of the job titles as necessary, since you will be assigning
them to employees.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Job Titles.
Job Title:
This field allows you to enter a Job Title name. For example you can have Manager
as one job title.
Default
Security Level:
This is the default security level the system will assign when a new employee is
created with this job title. This can be changed later in the employees file if
necessary.
Default Pay
Basis:
This is the default pay basis the system will assign when a new employee is created
with this job title. This can be changed later in the employees file if necessary.
Default Pay
Rate:
This is the default pay rate the system will assign when a new employee is created
with this job title. This can be changed later in the employees file if necessary.
Default Receive
Tips:
This option will tell the software that this job title receives tips by default. This can
be changed later in the employees file if necessary.
Hide Job Title:
This option will hide this job title when it is no longer used.
65
Software Setup
Employees > General
Description: This tab will specify general information about the employee that all employees will
have.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > General
First Name:
This field allows you to enter the first name of your employee.
Middle
Initial:
This field allows you to enter the middle initial of your employee.
Last Name:
This field allows you to enter the last name of your employee.
Tax Account
Number:
This field allows you to enter the number used for tax purposes.
Area Code +
Phone No.
This field allows you to enter the area code and phone number of your employee.
Mailing
Address:
This field allows you to enter the mailing address of your employee
Mailing
Postal Code:
This field allows you to enter the mailing postal code of your employee.
Job Title:
This drop down menu allows you to choose a job title for your employee. If you have
not created job titles previous to this, you can do this by clicking on the icon to the
right of the drop down menu.
Access Code:
This field allows you to enter an access code employees will use to identify
themselves to the system. This number cannot be changed if the employee has an
open staff bank. If using MSR cards to access the system, the employee should not be
given this number
Software Setup
Security
Level:
66
This drop down menu allows you to assign a security level to this employee. The
level of security is important and should be given some thought. A typical setup
is:
1: Cooks, Janitors, Dishwashers and anyone who does not need to use the
system often.
2: Hosts/Hostess, Food Expeditors, and people who need to use the system but
do not need to enter orders or deal in money exchange.
3: Wait Staff and anyone who will be taking orders and exchanging money with
customers.
4: Managers and Senior Wait Staff who are responsible for other employees.
5: Owners and General Managers who need to make decisions concerning the
operations of the restaurant.
MSR Card:
This field allows you to swipe an MSR card and have the card associated with this
employee. To use magnetic cards put the cursor in the MSR Card field and then
swipe the magnetic card through the card reader and this will automatically set up the
scan code for that employee.
Preferred
Language:
This drop down menu allows you to choose the language that this employee will be
using when they are working with the system.
Order Entry
Sec. Lang:
This option allows you to have the secondary language enabled. With this enabled
the user will see the secondary languages you have used in the menu item editors
secondary language field and any other secondary language fields in the software.
Employee is
Driver:
This option allows you to choose if this employee is a driver for delivery orders.
Holiday Pay
Scale:
This drop down list will specify what rate is paid when the employee works on a
holiday.
Work
Schedules:
This button is a quick access to the employee schedules screen.
67
Software Setup
Employees > Payroll
Description: This tab has a host of options that are related to payroll as well as other functions in the
software.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > Payroll
Hired Date:
This field allows you to enter the date the employee was hired. Format is
MM/DD/YYYY.
Terminated
Date:
This field allows you to enter the date the employee was terminated or released from
employment.
Pay Basis:
This drop down menu allows you to choose the pay basis this employee will receive.
If you choose Salaried, then the employees schedule will automatically NOT be
enforced.
Pay Rate:
This is the monetary value of pay the employee will receive based on the pay basis.
Tips
Received:
This option enables the popup to ask the employee how much in tips they have earned
as they are clocking out. This information will be recorded in the Server Gratuity
Report in the Back Office and also in the Main POS screen > Operations > Other
Tools.
Use Staff
Bank:
This option tells the software this employee will be using Staff Banking as their
means of taking and settling orders. If this option is enabled this employee will
ALWAYS pay to their staff bank when settling orders they have taken. Use this
option if your employees will be carrying money collected from customers until the
end of the shift.
Use Hostess
Features:
This option tells the software that this employee will need the ability to assign tables,
assign tabs, perform reservations, add customers to a waiting list, and use paging
features. This will enable the Hostess button in the table selection screen to allow
you to perform these functions.
Schedule Not
Enforced:
This option tells the software that the schedule for this employee will not be enforced.
This will disable the prompt for the managers access code when clocking in and the
employee is not on the schedule.
Software Setup
68
Is A Server:
This option will include this employee as a server in the reports section and
also in the lists that the hostess will use to assign tables.
Cannot Finalize
Cashier Out:
This option will disallow this employee the ability to finalize a cashier out
operation. To accomplish this, it disables the Done button in the cashiers
money count screen.
Allow Create / Replay

Emails:
This option will allow this employee to participate in using the internal
Aldelo For Restaurants email system.
Disallow Create / Edit

Dine In Orders:
This option will disallow this employee from creating or editing Dine In
Orders

Bar Tab Orders:
This option will disallow this employee from creating or editing Bar Tab
Orders

Take Out Orders:
This option will disallow this employee from creating or editing Take Out
Orders

Drive Thru Orders:
This option will disallow this employee from creating or editing Drive Thru
Orders

Delivery Orders:
This option will disallow this employee from creating or editing Delivery
Orders
Hide Employee:
This option will hide this employee from the system.
69
Software Setup
Employees > Driver
Description: This tab will specify information about the employee that pertains to their ability to do
deliveries.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > Driver
Driver License
Number:
This field allows you to enter the drivers license number.
Driver License
Expires:
This field allows you to enter the date the driver license expires.
Car Insurance
Carrier:
This field allows you to enter the insurance companies name the driver is insured
through.
Insurance
Policy No.
This field allows you to enter the policy number the insurance company has
provided to the driver for coverage
Insurance
Policy Expires:
This field allows you to enter the date that the policy will expire.
Insurance
Policy Notes:
This field allows you to enter any notes that you may want to record for this
insurance policy. Below this option is a time stamp icon that will put the date and
time of when the note was recorded.
Clock Button:
This button will time stamp an entry in the Notes field.
Employees > Notes

Description: This tab will specify information about the employee that managers have entered that is
not already tracked by Aldelo For Restaurants.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > Driver
Employee Notes:
In this field you can enter any notes about this employee that you may want to
keep on record.
Printer Button:
This will print the contents of the Employee Notes field to the report printer.
70
Software Setup
Employee Schedules
Description: This screen is used to create employee work schedules. You can have as many
scheduled weeks as you need.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Schedules
This will filter
employees by job title.
This is the current list

of employees.
You can add or edit

weeks here.
This will delete the

currently selected
work week.
This will show hidden

employees.
This will copy an

already created
schedule to this
employees schedule
This will include this

day in the next Add
operation you perform.
This will edit the

currently selected
schedule time for this
day.
71
Software Setup
Employee Schedules (cont.)
This will show the total number of hours for each type when you are creating the schedule. This is
updated as soon as the hours are adjusted to give a live representation of the employees schedule.
Software Setup
72
Menu Setup
Menu Categories
Description: Menu categories are used for reporting purposes only. It has nothing to do with the
visual display of the menu in the Order Entry screen. You assign each menu item to a specific menu
category, which will be shown when you create a sales report, to find out how much of each menu
category has been sold. For example, if you put all of your Beer and Wine in a category called Drinks,
that you created, then when you run a Sales By Category Report, it will show you the summary total of
the Drinks category sales information.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Categories
Menu Category:
This field allows you to enter a name for this category.
Hide Menu Category:
This option allows you to hide this menu category when it is no longer
used.
Pizza Builder Setup > Sizes

Description: This screen will define all the pizza sizes that your restaurant offers.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup > Sizes
Sizes:
This option will automatically check the selected sizes when you create toppings
and pizzas in the toppings and pizza screens.
Output Name:
This field will specify the name the kitchen will see when the chit prints. If this
field is left blank, the normal pizza size name will be used.
Secondary
Language:
This field will specify the secondary language name of the pizza size.
73
Software Setup
Pizza Builder Setup > Crusts
Description: This screen will define all the pizza crusts that you offer. You can Add and Edit crusts
from this screen. You can either click Add or Edit or double click on the item you wish to edit.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup > Crusts
This button will allow you to add a new crust type.
Pizza Builder Setup > Crusts > Add
Description: This screen will specify the information to use on a new crust type.
Add:
Edit:
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup > Crusts >
Add
Pizza Crust:
This field will specify the crust name.
Secondary
Language:
This field will specify the secondary language name of the crust.
Crust Price:
This field will specify the additional price of the crust. This field
can be left blank.
This button will bring up the Menu Modifiers screen with this item already selected. You will
be able to edit this crust from here.
Software Setup
74
Pizza Builder Setup > Toppings

Description: This screen will define all the toppings your restaurant offers. You can either click
Add or Edit or double click on the item you wish to edit.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup > Toppings
This button will allow you to add a new crust type.
Pizza Builder Setup > Toppings > Add
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup > Topping >
Add
Add:
Edit:
Pizza Topping:
This field will specify the name of the topping.
Secondary
Language:
This field will specify the secondary language name of the topping.
Sizes:
This option will automatically create toppings of the selected sizes

when you click OK.
Topping Price:
This field specifies the price of the topping for this size.
This button will bring up the Menu Modifiers screen with this item already selected. You will
be able to edit this topping from here.
75
Software Setup
Pizza Builder Setup > Pizzas
Description: This screen will define all the pizzas your restaurant offers. You can either click Add
or Edit or double click on the item you wish to edit.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup > Pizzas
This button will add a new pizza menu item
Pizza Builder Setup > Toppings > Add
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup > Topping
> Add
Add:
Pizza Name:
This field will specify the name of the pizza.
Secondary
Language:
This field will specify the secondary language name of the pizza.
Menu
Category:
This drop down list will specify the Menu Category for the pizzas.
Menu Group:
This drop down list will specify the Menu Group these pizzas belong
to.
Sizes:
This option will automatically create pizzas of the selected sizes

when you click OK.
Output Name:
This field will specify the name the kitchen will see when the chit
prints. If this field is left blank, the normal pizza size name will be
used.
Secondary
Language:
This field will specify the secondary language name the kitchen will
see.
Pizza Price:
This field will specify the price of the pizza for this size.
Edit:
This button will bring up the Menu Item Editor with this item already selected. You will
be able to edit this pizza from here.
Menu
Items:
This button will bring up the Menu Item Editor so that you may edit any menu item in the
system. This is just a shortcut to get you there faster.
76
Software Setup
Modifier Builder Template Setup
Description: This screen is used to create templates of modifiers to assign to menu items. Unlimited
templates can be created with custom categories and modifiers for each template.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Modifier Builder Template Setup
This is the name of the
template. You can
create as many
templates as needed.
This will create a new

template and allow a
name to be entered.
This will save the new

template once you
enter a name.
This will create a new

template based on the
currently selected
template.
These are categories

that organize your
modifiers into groups
This will edit the

category.
This is a modifier in
the currently selected
category
This will delete the

currently selected
template.
77
Software Setup
Modifier Builder Template Setup > Edit Category
Description: This screen is used to create templates of modifiers to assign to menu items. Unlimited
templates can be created with custom categories and modifiers for each template.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Modifier Builder Template Setup > Template
Name
Button Icon
This will specify the name of the category
This will specify the number of selections that

must be made before the user is allowed to select
another category.
This will specify the default type of modifier to

select when this category is selected.
This will specify the number of modifiers that

are allowed to be made for this category before
the user is not allowed to select any more
modifiers.
Software Setup
78
Modifier Builder Editor

Description: This screen will allow you to edit the modifier you selected on the template while editing
the template.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Modifier Builder Template Setup > Template
> Modifier
Template
Name:
This is the name of the template this modifier is currently assigned to.
Type Name:
This is the category that this modifier is current assigned to.
Modifier
Name:
This field will specify the name of the modifier.
Additional
Cost:
This field will specify the additional cost of the base modifier. The base modifier is
the normal modifier without the No, Add, Extra, Lite, etc.
Excluded
From Builder:
This option will define if this modifier will be included in the template or not. If
not, then the No, Add, Extra, etc version of the modifiers will only be shown. This
option is used if the base modifier does not make sense to include in the template.
Selected As
Default:
This option will automatically select this modifier when the category it is assigned
to is selected.
No, Add,
Extra, Light,
etc:
These options will specify which types of the base modifier will be shown when the
template is displayed in the order entry screen.
Additional
Cost:
These fields will specify the additional cost of the corresponding type. This
additional cost will override the additional cost of the base modifier.
Hide:
This button will hide this modifier.
Delete:
This button will delete this modifier.
Edit Icon:
These buttons will edit the corresponding modifier.
Select Hidden
Entry:
This drop down list will select a hidden modifier and fill in the details of that
modifier.
79
Software Setup
Menu Groups
Description: This screen will allow you to arrange your menu groups.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Groups
These are the menu groups available in your
restaurant. Click on the group to edit it.
This will bring up the schedule for the menu

groups.
Software Setup
80
Menu Group Editor

Description: This screen will allow you to edit your menu groups.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Groups > [Any Menu Group]
Group Name:
This field will specify the group name
Sec. Language:
This field will specify the secondary language name for this group
Picture:
This button will specify the picture to be used with this menu group.
Show Caption:
This option will show the group name when enabled.
Not Available For Dine

In Orders:
This option will specify if this menu group is available for Dine In orders.
Not Available For Bar

Tab Orders:
This option will specify if this menu group is available for Bar Tab orders.
Not Available For Take

Out Orders:
This option will specify if this menu group is available for Take Out
orders.
Not Available For Drive

Thru Orders:
This option will specify if this menu group is available for Drive Thru
orders.
Not Available For

Delivery Orders:
This option will specify if this menu group is available for Delivery orders.
Default Group For Dine

In Orders:
This option will specify if this menu group is the group that will be
selected by default when taking Dine In orders.
Default Group For Bar

Tab Orders:
selected by default when taking Bar Tab orders.
Default Group For

Other Orders:
selected by default when taking Take Out, Drive Thru, and Delivery
orders.
81
Software Setup
Menu Group Schedule
Description: This screen is used to create menu group schedules. The groups will be shown in the
order entry screen according to the schedule defined. If no schedule is defined for the day, the menu
group will show in the order entry screen by default.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Groups > Menu Group Schedule
This is the current list of
groups.

menu groups.
This will Add a schedule to this

day.
This drop down will

copy a schedule to the
schedule currently
being worked on.
This will Delete the currently

selected schedule for this day.

day in the next Add
operation you
perform.
This will edit the

currently selected
schedule time for this
day.
Software Setup
82
Menu Group Schedule Editor

Description: This screen will allow you to edit the schedule for this menu group.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Groups > Menu Group Schedule > Add
or Edit for any day while the group is selected.
Avail From Time:
This field will specify when the menu group will show in the order entry screen.
Avail To Time:
This field will specify when the menu group will stop showing in the order entry
screen.
83
Software Setup
Menu Items
Description: This screen will allow you to edit the menu items that are available in your restaurant.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Items
This will specify the group you want to view
This is a quick button

to the Pizza Builder
Setup screen

to the Forced
Modifiers editor
screen
These are the menu

items that can be
edited

to the menu groups
screen

to the Menu Item Auto
Prices screen

to the Menu Recipe
Editor screen.
Software Setup
84
Menu Item Editor

Description: This screen will allow you to edit the menu item that has been selected in the menu items
page.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Items > [Any Menu Group] > [Any
Menu Item]
Menu Item
Id:
This field has the number the database has assigned to the menu item.
Item Has
Same
Attribute As:
This will copy the configuration or Attributes of another menu item. This is useful in
saving time when you have several items that have the same properties.
Menu Item
Full Name:
This field allows you to enter a name for this menu item. The maximum number of
characters here is 22.
Secondary
Language
Name:
This field allows you to enter a name in the secondary language, which is the
equivalent of the Menu Item Full Name.
Menu
Category:
This field allows you to select a category this menu item will be assigned to for
reporting purposes. If you need to create or edit a menu category while in this screen,
use the icon to the right of the drop down list.
Button
Picture
Name:
This field allows you to enter a picture that will be used for this button. These should
be files with the file extension of .bmp and should be no more than 42 x 42 Pixels
with the caption and 51 x 103 without the caption. These values can vary so you
should test the picture before using it in your final menu.
Show
Caption:
This option allows you to choose whether or not to see the text on the button when in
the Order Entry screen when a picture is used.
Large Picture
Name:
This field allows you to enter a picture that will be used when the Details button is
used in the Order Entry screen.
This is A Top
Level Item:
This option allows you to make this item a Top Level Item. This means you will now
be able to create Sub-Level Items below this Top Level Item. For example, if you
have several types of sodas your restaurant will offer, you would create a Top Level
Menu Item called Soda. Under this Top Level Item you would create the different
brand names for each of the sodas you offer. A Top Level Menu Item can also be
referred to as the second tier in the menu structure.
85
Software Setup
Jump To
Group:
This field allows you to select a menu group you want this Top Level Menu Item to Jump
To when the button is pressed in the Order Entry screen. This is very useful if you want
one button in the order entry screen to take you to another menu group without
backtracking. Think of this as creating a Hyperlink in your Order Entry screen.
Pick
Color:
This option allows you to select the color this button will be.
Menu Item Editor > Page 1

Description: This screen will allow you to edit the menu item that has been selected in the menu
items page.
Menu Item] > Page 1
Default Item
Price:
This field allows you to enter a price for the menu item that will be used by default.
If you want this item to be open price, use 1234.56. This will bring up a dialog box
allowing you to enter the price for this menu item whenever it is ordered. This is
very useful for miscellaneous items not usually ordered.
Dine In
Delivery Item
Price:
These fields allow you to enter prices for each individual order type. When an item
is ordered using one of these types, the price defined will be used to charge the
customer. If you are using Auto Pricing, the Auto Price will override the prices used
here.
Send To
Printer At:
This drop down menu allows you to select which printer this item will be sent to
when the Settle, Cash Tender, or Done buttons are pressed in Order Entry.
Show Modifier
Type:
This drop down menu allows you to select the default modifier type that will be
shown when the Modifier button is pressed in the Order Entry screen.
Barcode:
This field allows you to enter the Barcode that will be assigned to this menu item.
This can be Alpha-Numeric input. Place your cursor in this field and scan the item
with the barcode.
Menu Item
Available:
This option tells the software to make the menu item button selectable in the Order
Entry screen. If this is unchecked the button will still be visible but will not activate
when pressed.
Show Pizza
Builder
Screen:
This option tells the software to show the Pizza Builder Screen when this item is
selected in the Order Entry. When you select this option, a dialog box will appear
asking you to select one of the sizes.
Print Pizza
Label:
This option will automatically print out a pizza label to stick on the pizza box when a
menu item is ordered.
Software Setup
86
Tax 1 Will
Apply:
This option allows you to apply Tax 1 to this item. The name of this Tax will
change if you change the Alias Name in Taxes.
Tax 2 Will
Apply:
Tax 3 Will
Apply:
Menu Item
Can Be
Discounted:
This option allows you to specify if this item can be discounted or not.
This is A Bar
Drink Item:
This option tells the software this item is a Bar Drink Item.
Order Item By
Weight:
This option allows you to order this menu item by weight in the Order Entry screen.
When this option is used, if the item is ordered, a weight dialog box will appear
allowing you to specify a weight. If the weight scale is used, the weight will
automatically appear in the dialog box.
Kitchen Sort
Number:
This field allows you to enter a number that will be used when determining in which
order the software needs to sort the menu items on the kitchen ticket. For example,
all Appetizers will have the number 1, all the Salads will have a number 2, and all
the entrees will have a number 3. This option is used in conjunction with the Sort
Kitchen Items Automatically On Kitchen Receipt option in Store Settings > Print >
Kitchen/Bar.
Menu Item Editor > Page 2

items page.
Menu Item] > Page 2
Menu Item
Description:
This field allows you to enter a description for this menu item. This can be
something like the recipe for the menu item.
Print Item To
Additional
Printers:
This option allows you to choose additional printers this menu item will be sent
to when the item is printed in the kitchen or bar.
Special Pizza
Topping Charges:
This option allows you to not charge or charge for the first specified number of
toppings. For example, if you do not want to charge for the first 4 toppings on
this pizza, you would select No Charge and type in 4 in the text field.
87
Software Setup
Item Delivery
Charge:
This field allows you to enter an amount that will be charged if this item is ordered
for Delivery.
Item Delivery
Comp:
This is the amount your driver will be compensated when they deliver this item.
Discount
Group #:
This field allows the user to assign a menu item to a specific Discount Group. For
example: All hamburgers will be assigned to group # 1all fries will be assigned to
group # 2.all soft drinks will be assigned to group # 3.
Maximum
Price:
This feature allows the user to set a max price on the menu item. This will allow the
price to increase up to the max item price when adding modifiers with a cost attached
to them.
Min. Recipe
Profit %:
This field will specify the minimum profit percentage you will want to make on this
menu item.
Use Modifier
Builder
Template:
This drop down menu allows you to choose which Modifier Builder Template you
want to use for this menu item. These where created previously in the Modifier
Builder Template Setup. This has to be selected for the Modifier Builder
Template feature to be enabled. If you need to create or edit one, you can use the
icon to the right of the drop down menu.
Menu Item
Type:
This drop down list will specify if this menu item is prepared food, a soft drink, or
bakery pastries. This feature only applies in certain special circumstances and is
rarely used. Refer to features in Store Settings > Other for more details on this
feature.
Sub Level Item Notes:
Menu Short Name: If this item is a Sub Level Item, you can specify a menu short name.
This name will be displayed in the Order Entry screen and CAN be the same as another menu
item short name. Sub Level Items are created when a menu item is created below a Top Level
Item.
Sec Lang: This field allows you to enter the secondary language equivalent of the Menu
Short Name.
88
Software Setup
Menu Item Auto Prices
Description: The purpose of this dialog box is to let you specify your menu items automatic price
adjustment based on the day of the week, and the time of day.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Item Auto Prices
This will filter the
menu items list by
group.
This will show the

menu items currently
available.
This will Add a new

price schedule for this
day.
This will Delete the

currently selected price
schedule.

menu items.
This drop down will

copy a schedule to the
schedule currently
being worked on.

day in the next Add
operation you perform.
This will edit the

currently selected
schedule for this day.
89
Software Setup
Menu Item Price Editor
items page.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Items Auto Prices > Add or Edit
Price Start Time:
This field will specify the time that this price schedule will start
Price End Time:
This field will specify the time that this price schedule will end
Price Note:
This field will specify any notes about what this schedule is for.
Item Price:
This field will specify the price to charge for this item during the scheduled time.
Menu Item Price Editor

Description: The purpose of this screen is to let you specify the menu modifiers for your restaurant.
The modifiers are instructions or adjustments to the main menu item therefore they cant be setup to
track inventory depletion by sales events.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Modifiers
Search Field:
This field will automatically search while you type a modifier name
Menu Modifier
List:
This is the list of modifiers that you current have
Menu Modifier:
This field allows you to type in the name of this modifier.
Secondary
Language:
This field allows you to enter the secondary language equivalent of the Menu
Modifier field.
Additional Cost:
This field allows you to enter a price that will be added any time this modifier
is used.
Picture:
This field allows you to choose a picture that will be used for this modifier
button. These pictures should be 42 x 42 pixels.
Show Button
Caption:
This option allows you to choose if the name for this modifier will be shown on
the button.
Hide Modifier:
This option allows you to hide the modifier when it is no longer used.
Software Setup
90
Pizza
Crust:
This option allows you to specify if this modifier is a pizza crust.
Pizza
Topping:
This option allows you to specify if this modifier is a pizza topping. If you select the
Pizza Topping check box, the modifier will show up in the Pizza Builder screen. Also,
when you select Pizza Topping, the software will ask you which pizza size you would
like to assign this modifier to. If you do not want to assign the modifier to a specific
pizza, Click Cancel.
Bar Mixer:
This option allows you to put this modifier in the Bar Mixing category when in the
Modifier screen.
Bar Drink:
This option will specify this modifier as a bar drink.
Select
Modifier
Recipe:
This is a shortcut button to the Modifier Recipe Selector screen where you select which
recipe will be assigned to this modifier. This will automatically select the modifier
currently being edited when you enter this screen.
Tech Tip: Use these naming conventions to add these modifiers to a specific type.
1) The Add modifier group: +, Add, With (i.e. + Salt, Add Cheese, With
Pepper)
2) The Extra modifier group: Extra, More, Heavy (i.e. Extra Lemon,
More Sauce, Heavy Chili)
3) The No modifier group: -, (i.e. Chicken, No Beef)
4) The Light modifier group: Light, Lite, Little, Easy (i.e. Light Sauce,
Little Pepper, Easy Salt)
5) The Exchange modifier group: Exchange, Trade, Switch, Subs, To,
->
6) The Half modifier group: = = = (i.e. = = = 1st Half = = =)
91
Software Setup
Forced Modifier Editor
Description: The purpose of this screen is to let you maintain the forced modifier links. The forced
modifiers are used as prompts to your server when they order an item that has choices that must be
selected. For example, it is customary to select the meat preparation and side dishes for a steak dinner.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Item Auto Prices
This will
filter the
menu items
by group
This is the list of menu

items currently available
This will show the

current list of
modifiers for this
level popup
This will Edit the list of

modifiers for this menu
item that will be shown on
this level popup.
This will
show hidden
menu items.
This drop down will copy

a modifier setup to the
modifier setup currently
being worked on.

day in the next Add
operation you
perform.
This will Delete the list of

modifiers for this level
popup.
92
Software Setup
Forced Modifier Editor
Description: The purpose of this screen is to edit the modifiers that will popup for this level.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Forced Modifiers > [Any Menu Item] > Add
or Edit
This will filter the menu
modifiers as you type the
name of the modifier you
want to add.
This is the list of menu

modifiers currently
available
This will show the current list of

modifiers for this level popup
This will filter the modifiers

by type.
This take you to the menu

modifier screen so you
can create a new
modifier.
This is a shortcut button to the

Modifier Recipe Selector screen where
you select which recipe will be
assigned to this modifier.
93
Software Setup
Inventory Setup
Inventory Groups
Description: The purpose of this screen is to let you maintain a list of the inventory groups for
grouping your inventory items into the logical sections. You can assign inventory items to the
inventory groups so that you can review your inventory items in a better and more understandable way
rather than seeing all inventory items listed randomly.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Inventory Groups
Inventory Group Name:
This field allows you to enter a name for this inventory group
Hide Inventory Group:
This option allows you to hide this inventory group if it is no longer

used.
Inventory Locations
Description: The purpose of this screen is to let you maintain a list of your inventory locations for
grouping your inventory items into logical areas.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Inventory Locations
Inventory
Location Name:
This field allows you to enter a name for this inventory location.
Display Sequence
Number:
This field allows you to enter a number to assign as the sequence number. This
will determine the order in which the Inventory Locations will be displayed.
Hide Location:
This option allows you to hide this Inventory Location if it is no longer used
Software Setup
94
Inventory Vendor
Description: The purpose of this screen is to let you maintain a list of your inventory vendors. The
inventory vendors can be linked to the inventory items, to show who the preferred vendor for that
particular item is.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Inventory Vendors
Inventory Vendor Name:
This field allows you to enter a name for this Inventory Vendor.
Hide Inventory Vendor:
This option allows you to hide this Inventory Vendor if it is no longer

used.
Inventory Items
Description: The purpose of this screen is to let you maintain a list of inventory items that the
restaurant buys or uses. The items defined in this dialog window will be used in the menu recipe
definition. The following is an explanation of each of the fields so that you will be able to understand
this important screen in more detail.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Inventory Items
Inventory Item
Name:
This field will specify the inventory item name
Item
Secondary
Language:
This field will specify the secondary language name of the inventory item
Pack Size
Description:
This field allows you to enter the total pack size description in descriptive words for
this inventory item. For example, if your have an inventory item called Case of
Bud and the pack size may be Case of 24 Bottles. Pack Size description is used
for your descriptive purpose and is not used in the actual calculation of inventory
quantities.
Pack Size
Barcode:
This field allows you to specify the pack size quantity barcode either from the boxs
UPC or your own barcode data. Place the cursor in this field and use the scanner to
scan the barcode into the field.
Each Item
Barcode:
This field allows you to enter a barcode for each individual item in the pack size.
For example, each bottle of Budweiser in the case will also have a barcode that will
be needed to calculate the inventory totals.
95
Software Setup
If you have specified the Each Item Barcode, you should specify the total items per
pack size in this field. Youre basically telling the computer how many individually
Total Items Per
packed items there are per each pack size description. For example, take the Case of
Pack Size:
24 Bottles as a scenario. The Total Items Per Pack Size should be 24 since there
are 24 bottles in a case.
Recipe Units /
Pack Size:
This field allows you to specify how much each of the pack size quantity will yield
for the menu item recipe. For example, if the pack size quantity was a case of beef
weighing 80 lbs. and your recipes call for ounces, you would enter 1280 to signify
that there are 1280 recipe units per pack size. (80 pounds at 16 ounces per pound)
Inventory
Group:
This drop down menu allows you to select the inventory group.
Inventory
Location:
This drop down menu allows you to select the inventory location.
Inventory
Vendor:
This drop down menu allows you to select the inventory vendor.
Sort Order:
This field allows you to specify the sort order of this inventory item for easier
inventory counting. This will determine in which order the items will appear in the
Physical Inventory Count Sheet
Pack Size ReOrder Point:
This field allows you to specify what level you want the pack size to deplete to before
that item is to be reordered.
Pack Size
Replenish
Level:
This field allows you specify the amount that you want to replenish to when the item
is reordered.
Inventory
Description:
In this field you will enter the description of this inventory item.
Pack Size Qty

On Hand:
This field allows you to specify the total pack size quantity that you currently have on
hand. You should only modify this field when you first set up the inventory
information. Afterwards, this field will automatically be adjusted by receiving
inventory or physical inventory counts. If you notice the number in this field to be a
decimal instead of a whole number, its because the amount on hand is a decimal of
the pack size and not the item size. For example, if you have a case of soda with 24
cans and you deplete one can the remaining will be 23/24 of a full case.
Pack Size Cost

Per Qty:
This field allows you to specify the cost per each of the pack size quantity currently
on hand. You should only modify this field when you are first setting up the
inventory information. Afterwards, this field will automatically be adjusted by
receiving inventory or physical inventory count activities.
Software Setup
96
Total Pack Size

Value:
This field is automatically calculated based on the information from Pack Size Qty
On Hand and Cost Per Pack Size Qty
Inventory Last
Updated:
This field shows the last time this inventory item has been updated by the system.
The receive inventory and physical inventory count will automatically adjust this
field accordingly.
Hide Inventory
Item:
This option allows you to hide this Inventory Item when it is no longer used.
Tech Tip: The most important fields to pay attention to are the recipe units per pack
size and the cost per pack size fields. The recipe units per pack size is used to
calculate how many units this inventory item will produce when being used in
creating menu items. For example, if you have a package of cheese and there are 24
slices of cheese in the package, there would be 24 recipe units in this package since
you usually use the cheese by the slice. If you buy the packages of cheese in cases
and there are 10 packages of cheese in the case, then you would enter 240 recipe units
per pack size. For things like liquid or ground beef that can have more than one way
to measure them, you would choose the least common denominator when picking
how to calculate the recipe units. For example, if you receive your ground beef in 10
lb. cases and you need to enter the recipe units per pack size, you would think about
how you would measure the ground beef when cooking the food. Most restaurants
use oz. when weighing ground beef. So you would convert 10 lbs. to oz. and enter the
number of oz. in the recipe units per pack size field. Same goes for liquid, if you
receive the bottle in 750ml bottles but you serve in oz, how many oz are in a bottle?
This is the number you would enter into the recipe units per pack size.
97
Software Setup
Menu Recipe Editor
Description: The purpose of this dialog box is to let you configure your menu item recipe so that your
estimated inventory usage can be reviewed according to the sales activities.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Menu Recipe Editor
This will filter the
menu items by group
These are the menu

items currently
available
This will specify the

inventory items you
want to add to this
recipe
This will specify the

units of this inventory
item you want to add
to this recipe
This is the current

recipe for the
currently selected
menu item
This information about

the recipe cost of the
menu item.
This will Save this

recipe for the
currently selected
menu item.
This will update the

Current Retail to
match the Min. Retail.
Software Setup
98
Menu Recipe Editor (cont.)

Description: The purpose of this dialog box is to let you configure your menu item recipe so that your
estimated inventory usage can be reviewed according to the sales activities.
This will Add the inventory item with the units used to the recipe.
This will take you to the Global Replace Inventory Items screen.
99
Software Setup
Menu Recipe Editor (cont.)
Description: The purpose of this screen is to update your menu item recipe inventory items that you
no longer use with items that you do use.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Menu Recipe Editor > Global Replace
Inventory Items
This is the inventory item that needs to be searched for.
This is the inventory item you will want to use to replace the previous inventory item
100
Software Setup
Menu Recipe Editor (Modifiers)
Description: The purpose of this screen is to let you configure your menu modifier recipe so that your
estimated inventory usage can be reviewed according to the sales activities. To get to this screen you
will need to drop the list down in the top left corner and select Modifier Recipes
This field will specify
the inventory item
This field will specify the inventory item units that
that will be used in
will be used in this recipe
this recipe.
This button will

change the name of
the recipe.
This button will create a new recipe. A new recipe

should be created for every modifier you have. To
avoid conflicts with other menu items in the system,
you should create names like Mod:Absolut.
This will Add the

inventory item with
the units used to the
recipe.
This will take you to

the Global Replace
Inventory Items
screen.
101
Software Setup
Modifier Recipe Selector
Description: The purpose of this screen is to assign a recipe to a modifier.

Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Modifier Recipe Selector
This field will search for the
modifier as you type.
These are the modifiers

currently available.
This will Edit the recipe currently selected in

the window below the button
This field will search for the

modifier recipe as you type.
This window contains all the modifier recipes

currently available.
Software Setup
102
Inventory UOM
Description: The purpose of this screen is to keep track of all the Units of Measure you have in your
inventory.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Inventory UOM
UOM
Name:
This field will specify the Unit of Measure name that will be used.
Recipe
Units:
This field will specify the actual units in this unit of measure. For example, there are 16
oz. (Recipe Units) in a Pound (UOM Name).
Hide
UOM:
This will hide this UOM.
Tech Tip: This screen does not actually calculate anything. This is only a list that
can be created for reference.
103
Part 3
Software Operation
Opening Procedures
Chapter 6
Opening Procedures
104
105
Opening Procedures
Time Cards
Before starting your day, you might want to cover a few things about your employment at the
restaurant. You will also want to clock in, start your staff bank and maybe even have a pager assigned
to you. This section will cover many of the things you do when you first come into the restaurant.
Clocking In
The first operation you will want to do before anything else is clock in. If you are a salaried employee,
you will be able to clock in at any time you wish. If you are an hourly employee, you might not be
allowed to clock in until your scheduled time. If you want to disable this behavior and allow employees
to clock in at all times, check in the option Schedule Not Enforced in the employees file under the
Payroll tab.
Another option for your employees is to allow a grace period before their scheduled clock in time. This
can be found in the Advanced Settings section. The option will be called Time Card Clock In Grace
Minutes. When you find this setting, highlight it and click Edit to change the value of the setting. This
will allow employees to clock in before their scheduled time and allow them to start their day early.
This time will be added for payroll purposes. If you do not wish to pay the employee for the grace
minutes, you can round the time to the nearest quarter hour. This feature is called Time Card Clock
Rounding Minutes and is also found in the Advanced Settings section.
To clock in, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the Time Card button in the Main POS screen. This will ask you for your access
code. You should have already created an employee file for each employee that will be
working in the restaurant.
Enter your access code. This will take you to the Employee Time Card screen with the name
of the employee that is accessing this screen and their job title.
Click on the Clock In button. This will display your clock in time.
a. If this employee has multiple jobs, the system will ask what job you will be working.
There are two requirements to enable multiple jobs.
i. The employee must have two separate employee files with the exact same
information except the job title and the pay rate.
ii. The option called Employee with Multi Job Selection must be checked.
This option can be found in Store Settings > Staff / CRM.
Tech Tip: This screen will go away after you Clock In so you may want to use the
Stay button to keep you in this screen until you are finished with everything you
need.
Opening Procedures
106
Viewing Your Schedule

While you are in the Time Card screen, you may want to see what you schedule looks like for a
particular week.
To view your schedule, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are already in the Time Card
screen.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the View Schedule button. This will bring up the date picker so you can enter the
week you would like to see.
Enter any date in the week you would like to see. This will bring up the report showing what
your scheduled time is for that work week.
Either print the report on the receipt printer or click OK to exit the screen.
Information on the schedule includes the employee name, job title, date / time is was generated, the
employees scheduled hours including breaks, regular hours, overtime and double time hours, and the
total hours worked.
Earnings Report
While you are in the Time Card screen, you may also want to see how much you have earned up to this
point for the current pay period.
To view your current earnings, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are already in the Time
Card screen.
1.
2.
Click on the Earning Report button. This will bring up the report with the current
information for this pay period.
Either print the report on the receipt printer of click OK to exit the screen.
Information on this report includes the employees name, salary type, title, data range of the report, list
of clock in and out times, total hours for each day, total money earned, any wage advances, total hours
worked, and net wages earned.
Register a Pager
If your restaurant uses Staff Paging, you will have a pager assigned to you. There are two types of
pagers that can be used. If you are a regular employee, an alphanumeric pager should be used. If you a
manager, you will also want an alphanumeric pager that supports text so that you will receive updates
on sales information and other statuses. The pager that will be assigned to the manager has a special
number. This number is specified in the option called Manager Alert Pager Number. This option is
found in Store Settings > Other.
107
Opening Procedures
There is also security that can be set to only allow authorized employees to assign pagers. This setting
is called Staff Paging Register Pager Security Level. This is found in Store Settings > Services >
Hostess / Paging Setup >General.
To have a pager assigned to you, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are already in the
Time Card screen.
1.
2.
3.
Click the Pager button. This will bring up the Staff Paging screen. This is where you will
assign a pager as well as send pages to the manager or other employees.
Click Register Pager. This will bring up a keypad where you will enter the number of the
pager you wish to use.
Enter the number of the pager you wish to use. This should send a test page to the pager
verifying that the pager is operational.
Opening Procedures
108
Starting Your Bank
Starting Staff Bank

There are two options in Aldelo For Restaurants for managing settlement transactions. One is the Cash
Drawer. The other is Staff Bank. Staff Bank is used when the employee will be taking care of their
own money and a cash drawer will not be assigned to them. It is often thought of as their own personal
cash drawer without the physical cash drawer. Money pouches are often used to carry the cash and
change. The one limitation employees will encounter is if they use Staff Bank, they cannot be a cashier.
Only one can be used at any time.
To enable staff banking, there are a couple of required options that need to be checked.
1.
2.
Enable Staff Banking needs to be checked. This is located in Store Settings > Revenue >
Cashier.
Use Staff Bank also needs to be enabled for every employee that will be using it. This is
located in Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > [Any Employee] >
Payroll
Once you have enabled staff bank in the system and also for the employee, you should see a new Start
Staff Bank button in the Time Card screen.
To start staff bank, follow the steps below. These steps assume staff banking has been enabled and the
employee is in the Time Card screen.
1.
2.
Click on Start Staff Bank. This will bring up a keypad so that you can enter the start
amount.
Start amount can either be given by the restaurant or provided by the employee. Once you
enter the amount, the system will ask who provided the start amount.
You can also have Staff Bank start automatically when you clock in. This option is called Auto Start
Staff Bank When Clock In. This will always start the staff bank with a start amount of $0.00.
109
Opening Procedures
Cashier In
The main way to settle transactions in a restaurant is to use a cash drawer. Most restaurants have at
least one cash drawer if not a cash drawer for every station. Before taking payments from customers,
you need to tell the system you have a cash tray available to receive money. Many features are
exclusive to cash drawers and are not available to Staff Bank. These are Gift Certificate, Pay Out,
Refund, and Settle. Staff Bank can still settle orders although not through the Settle button in the
Main POS screen.
To enable Cashiers, at least one cash tray needs to be created. Follow the steps below to create a cash
drawer. These steps assume you are in the Back Office.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Setup. This is located in the top left part of the screen.
Navigate to and click on General Settings. This will give you all the options under General
Settings.
Navigate to and click on Cash Trays. This will bring you to the Cash Trays screen.
Enter in the name of the cash tray. This can be any name. The name is only used for reference
and does not show up when performing Cashier In or Out.
Click Save.
To cashier in, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have clocked in.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click the Cashier In button in the Main POS screen. This will bring up a keypad so you can
enter your access code.
a. This step can be secured so that only authorized employees can cashier in. The
security is called Cashier Sign In/Cashier Sign Out and is located in Security
Settings.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the screen allowing you to select which cash tray
you would like to assign to yourself.
Click on the cash tray you would like to assign to yourself. This will bring up the Money
Count screen where you will enter the start amount of the drawer.
a. There are 12 denominations that are available. These denominations can be changed
in Store Settings > Revenue > Other. The feature is called Custom Currency
Denominations. This is used mainly by customers in countries other than the United
States.
Enter in all the currency you will start the drawer with. Make sure this information is correct
or your drawer will show a discrepancy at the end of the shift.
Click Finish. This will prompt you if you are finished with your money count.
Click Yes or No.
110
Opening Procedures
Money Count Screen
These are the
denominations
available in your
restaurant.
These are the checks

and Room Charges (if
available) that you
have received.
These are the credit

card charges that you
have received.
This is a built in
number pad so a
keyboard is not
required.
This works the same as

the tab button on the
keyboard and will go
from one field to the
next.
This will close the

cash drawer and
assume the money in
the drawer is correct.
This is a quick way to

enter the amount
counted so you dont
have to enter each
denomination
separately.
This will save checks

and charges that you
have already
accounted for and do
not want to count at
the end of the shift.
111
Hostess Procedures
Chapter 7
Hostess Procedures
Dine In Orders
112
Reservations
If your restaurant accepts reservations, Aldelo For Restaurants has many features to accomplish the
task. This job is usually handled by the hostess but can be handled by any employee with access to the
hostess features.
The hostess feature can be enabled by enabling the option called Use Hostess Features. This is located
in the Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > Payroll. Once this feature is enabled,
three buttons will show up in the Table Selection screen. Hostess, Assign Table, and Assign Tab.
To access the reservation system, you will need to click on the Hostess button in the Table Selection
screen. Follow the steps below to access the reservation system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on the Dine In button in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access
code.
Enter your access code. This will take you to the Table Selection screen.
Click on the Hostess button. This will bring up the Hostess screen.
The default tab is the reservation tab.
a. The reservation tab can be disabled if this will not be used in your restaurant. You
can do this by enabling the option Disable Reservation Feature. This option can be
found in Store Settings > Services > Dine In > Hostess / Paging Setup > Reservation.
Creating A Reservation
To create a new reservation, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are already in the Hostess
screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
While in the Reservation tab, click on New. This will bring up the new reservation screen
where you will enter the reservation information.
If you already have the customer information stored in your database, you can ask for the
customer phone number. If the customer is not in the database, you will have to manually
enter the name in the Party field. If the customer is found, the Party field will be
automatically populated.
Click on the Adults button to enter how many adults will be arriving. Repeat this for the
children, highchair, and wheelchair.
Click on the type of seating requested. These are the buttons below the customer type buttons.
Click on the Enter Reservation Time and Table button. This will bring up the Select
Reservation Time and Table screen.
Click on the date button at the top of the screen. This will bring up the date picker so you can
choose the date of the reservation.
Choose the reservation date. This will take you back to the Select Reservation Time and
Table screen.
Select the time of the reservation in one of the two time columns. The left is AM and the right
is PM. You can adjust the time to each quarter hour with the buttons below the hour lists.
113
Dine In Orders
9.
Select the table you wish to use for the reservation. If this table is not available, it will either
be Yellow, Green, or Blue. If it is available, it will be grey or flashing.
Changing A Reservation
Once you have created a reservation, you may need to change it to accommodate a customer request.
Any information in the reservation can be changed and is exactly the same as creating a reservation.
To change a reservation, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are already in the reservation
tab.
1.
2.
3.
Click on and highlight the reservation you wish to edit.

Click Edit. This will bring up the screen where you can change any of the information you
had previously entered.
Once you have changed the information, click Done. This will update the reservation.
If a reservation needs to be changed after it has been marked as Checked In, Walk Out, No Show, or
Cancelled, you will need to check in the Make Active option. To show the reservations that have
been marked with the various statuses, you can click on the filter buttons at the bottom of the
reservation list.
Other options in the reservation tab include:
Date picker to change the day currently being viewed

A Today button to quickly change to the current day.
A print option to print the reservation list currently being viewed.
Navigation arrows to scroll up and down the list when no keyboard is present.
Checking In A Reservation
When a customer arrives for their reservation, you will need to check the customer in. To check in a
reservation simply highlight the reservation and click Check In. If the customer arrives a bit early
and needs to wait until their table is ready, you can assign them a pager to notify them when the table is
ready. This way they can go to the bar and relax while they wait.
Dine In Orders
114
Waiting List
If your restaurant wants to keep track of customers waiting to be seated, you can use the waiting list
feature of the software. This feature is included in the hostess features along with reservations and
paging. The waiting list works very similar to the reservation window. Many of the same buttons exist
and work the same way.
If you want to disable the waiting list features, you will have to enable the option called Disable
Waiting List Feature. This option can be found in Store Settings > Services > Dine In > Hostess /
Paging Setup > Waiting List.
Add A Customer to the Waiting List
To create a new waiting list entry, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are already in the
Hostess screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
While in the Waiting List tab, click on New. This will bring up the new waiting list entry
screen where you will enter the customer information.
If you already have the customer information stored in your database, you can ask for the
customer phone number. If the customer is not in the database, you will have to manually
enter the name in the Party field. If the customer is found, the Party field will be
automatically populated.
Click on the Adults button to enter how many adults will be arriving. Repeat this for the
children, highchair, and wheelchair.
Select the type of seating the customer requests. These are the buttons below the Adults,
Children, etc. buttons.
Assign a pager if the paging system is being used. This will send a test page to the pager to
ensure that the pager is operating correctly.
Click Done
Check In the Customer

When a table matches the customer specifications, the system will recommend a table. This will show
up in the Elapsed field of the Waiting List screen. The recommended table will show up next to the
elapsed time. Once a table has been identified as ready, the customer can be notified by highlighting
the entry in the waiting list and clicking Paging.
Other options in the reservation tab include:
Date picker to change the day currently being viewed

A Today button to quickly change to the current day.
A print option to print the reservation list currently being viewed.
Navigation arrows to scroll up and down the list when no keyboard is present.
115
Dine In Orders
Assigning a Table
If you want to manually assign a table to an employee, the hostess also has this option. These features
will not be available unless the employee has access to the hostess features. When a hostess is going to
assign a table, the employee being assigned the table needs to be classified as a server. This setting is
called Is A Server and is located in Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files.
To assign a table to a server, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the Table Selection
screen as the hostess.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on Assign Table. This will bring up the screen with a list of employees that have the
Is A Server option checked in their employee file and are clocked in.
Highlight the employee you wish to assign the table to and click Select. This will bring you
to the Select Table Number screen.
Click the table number you wish to assign to the employee. This will bring up a prompt asking
for the number of guests for this table.
Enter the number of guests. This will assign the table to the employee.
Dine In Orders
Chapter 8
Dine In Orders
116
117
Dine In Orders
Order Entry
When your customers are sitting at a table, they will want to start ordering their items. This is where
the order entry system will come into play. Dine In orders are considered orders that are associated
with a table. If you wish to call the Dine In something other than Dine In, you can change this by
using the feature called Alias Name. This can be found in Store Setting > Services > Dine In.
To create a new order, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on the Dine In button on the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access
code.
a. The only time you will not get prompted for your access code is if you enable the
option called Auto recognize this stations cashier as the default employee without
login. This option is located in Station Settings > Cashier.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the Table Selection screen.
a. If you wish to skip the table selection screen and go directly into the order entry
screen, you can use the option called Skip Table Selection. This option is found in
Store Settings > Services > Dine In.
Click on the table group you wish you see. This will bring up all tables for this group.
a. If you only want employees to see tables assigned to them, you can use the table
assignment feature. This is different than the hostess feature in the fact that these are
permanent assignments. This screen is located in Back Office > Setup > Table Setup
> Dine In Tables.
Click on the table you wish to work with. This will bring up a keypad asking how many
guests will be sitting at this table.
a. If there is already ticket on this table you will get a screen showing the tickets current
open. Click on the ticket you wish to work with.
Enter the number of guests and click Enter. This will take you to the Order Entry screen.
a. The default number of guests is pulled from the Total Seats field when creating the
table. This field is located in Back Office > Setup > Table Setup > Dine In Tables >
[Any Table].
b. If you do not wish to enter the number of guests, you can disable the option called
Track Guest Count For Dine In Orders. Uncheck this option and you will not be
prompted for the number of guests.
Once you are in the Order Entry screen, you will have many functions to choose from. The Order Entry
screen is arranged to provide the fastest operations possible. All commonly used buttons are located on
this screen for easy access. The menu groups are located on the left hand side and the menu items to
the right of the menu groups. As you click on each menu group, the menu items will change to what is
in the currently selected group. Action buttons are located below the menu items and are used to
perform various tasks with the order. Order settlement information is located in the lower right corner
of the screen and is used to also send the order to the kitchen.
118
Dine In Orders
Money Count Screen
These are the Menu
Groups.
These are the Menu

Items
These are action

buttons to change
various properties of
the order.
This is where you can

change the seat you are
currently ordering items
for
These are action

buttons that perform
various actions on the
order.
This is the payment

information.
These are the payment

options. Use either
Cash Tender or Settle.
This is the on-screen

ticket. This will show
all ticket activity.
119
Dine In Orders
Adding Items
Once you are in the Order Entry screen and you want to add some items to the ticket, all you will have
to do is click on the menu group where the item is located and then on the item you wish to order. You
will see that the item is added to the ticket on the on screen ticket.
To add an item to the ticket, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the Order Entry
screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on the Menu Group where the item is located. This will show all the menu items for this
group.
Click on the Menu Item you want to add to the ticket.
a. If the menu item has Forced Modifiers or a Modifier Builder Template assigned to it,
these will pop up after the menu item is clicked.
Click Done to send the items to the kitchen.
a. If you do not want to send the items to the kitchen right away, you can disable the
send feature temporarily. The next time you recall the order the item will be sent
unless you delay it again. This button is called No Kitchen Bar and is found in the
Order Entry screen > Misc.
(Optional) If you want to settle the order right away, you can use the settlement functions to do
so.
a. The first option is the Cash Tender button. This button will assume the customer is
paying with cash and bring up a screen allowing you to enter the amount tendered.
b. The second option is the Settle button. This button is used for all forms of payment
and should be used when cash is not the form of payment.
(Optional) If you want to save this ticket and start another ticket for this table, you can also use
the Chain button. This button will send the current order to the kitchen and start a new order
for this table. This is useful if the customer has already decided to have separate checks
among themselves.
Dine In Orders
120
Voiding Items
As you are entering items, you may make a mistake and need to clear the item. This can be done using
the Void button. This button is located in the Order Entry screen below the menu items. There is
security on this function and can only be done by authorized employees. This is one exception to this
rule. If the order has not been sent to the kitchen yet, you may void the item without any authorization.
The security for this function is called Void Order or Items and is located in Security Settings.
To void an item, follow the steps below. These steps assume you already have a menu item ordered and
are in the Order Entry screen.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the Void button in the Order Entry screen. This will bring up the screen where you
will select the menu item you would like to void.
Highlight the item you would like to void.
a. If the item has been sent to the kitchen, you will see a [*] next to the item name.
b. You can also reduce the number of the item if there are more than 1 on the same line.
Use the Reduce button to do this.
c. If you want to void the entire line, use the Void Line button.
Click the Done button.
Re-Ordering Items
After you have sent the items to the kitchen or bar, the customer may want to order more of the same
item. If this item had many changes to it, it looks bad if you have to ask the customer what their
preferences were again.
To order the same item with the same modifiers, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in
the order entry screen and items have been ordered.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the Re-Order button. This will bring up a list of items that have already been
ordered for this ticket.
Select the item that the customer has indicated they would like to order.
a. You will stay in this screen until you click Done which will allow you to order
many items at once. This is useful for things like beer which usually come in rounds.
Click Done
121
Dine In Orders
Holding Items
If you need to delay the sending of the food to the kitchen, you can use the hold function to accomplish
this. There are two forms of hold in the Order Entry screen. Item holds and Order holds. If you hold
the entire order, all the items are on the same timer. If you hold individual items, they can all have
different hold times.
To hold and item, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the Order Entry screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click on the item you wish to order.

Click on the Hold button. This will bring up the screen that lists all the items on the current
ticket. Items that have been sent to the kitchen are marked with a [*].
Highlight the item(s) you wish to hold. You can hold items that have been sent to the kitchen
as well as items that have not been sent to the kitchen.
a. If you wish to hold the entire order, click the Select All button to select all the
items.
Click method you wish to use. There are three options you can use.
a. Hold Until Notified will hold the order or items until you remove the hold status.
b. Hold Time will allow you to select how long you wish the hold status to be active.
i. The Hold Time screen has many options to allow you to adjust the time to
exactly how long you wish the hold status to be active.
c. Future Date Hold will allow you to hold an order or items that will be prepared on a
future date.
Click Done
Click Done in the Order Entry screen to save the hold times to the order.
a. This will print a chit in the kitchen with the items and a Hold status.
i. If you dont want a ticket to print to the kitchen, you can use the feature
called Enable Delayed Send Order Feature. This can be found in Store
Settings > Print > Kitchen / Bar.
122
Dine In Orders
Hold Screen
These are the items you Use this to hold until
can hold.
you remove the hold
status
Use this to hold for a

specified amount of
time.
Use this to select all the items or click it again to

unselect all the items.
Use this to hold until a future date. This button

will show the Date button in the Hold Time
Screen.
Use this to clear the

hold time on selected
items
123
Dine In Orders
Hold Time Screen
These are the quick buttons for

number of minutes.
These will adjust the time

manually.
This will show the specified

hold release time.
This will change the date of the

hold to allow future hold dates.
This will clear the hold time
This will accept the hold time

and apply it to the order or item.
Dine In Orders
124
Releasing the Hold

Once an item or order is on hold, there are two ways the status can be removed. The first is if the hold
time on the item or order expires. Once the time expires, the item or order will be sent to the kitchen
with a fire command. The other way is if the item or order has the hold status manually removed.
To remove the hold status manually from the order, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are
in the Order Entry screen with menu items on hold.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Hold button in the Order Entry screen. This will bring up the Hold screen.
Highlight the item(s) you wish to remove the hold status from.
Click the Clear Hold Time button. This will remove the hold status from the item or orders.
Click Done.
a. Once you click Done, the order will be sent to the kitchen with a >>>Fire<<<
command listing all the items that have been released.
Splitting an Order
Customers sometimes want to split their tickets. This could happen at anytime during the customers
visit. They may tell you before ordering in which case the Chain button should be used in Order
Entry to create multiple orders. If the customer mentions they would like to split the check and items
have already been ordered, you can still split the items into separate checks. This is done using the
Split button in the Order Entry screen.
To split items onto separate checks, follow the steps below. These steps assume you already have items
ordered on the ticket and are in the Order Entry screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click the Split button in the Order Entry screen. This will bring up a keypad asking how
many additional checks you would like to create.
Enter the number of additional checks you would like to create. This will be the number of
checks you would like to create in addition to the check you already have open. This will
bring up the Split Order screen.
Select the check you would like to work with in the top right corner of the screen. This will be
the check you are going to add items to.
Click on the items you would like to add to this check. You will see them added to the right
hand ticket window.
a. If you make a mistake you can remove one or all items from the ticket window and
start over.
(Optional) Click on the Guests button and enter the number of guests for this check.
Repeat steps 3-5 until you have assigned the items you would like to split off of the main
check. The remaining items will be left on the original check.
Click Finish. This will bring up the window allowing you to select which checks you want
to print.
Highlight the checks you would like to print and click Print Selected or Print All / Print
None.
125
Dine In Orders
Combine Orders
Customers sometimes may want to pick up a tab for their friend or change their minds on having
separate checks. When this happens you will want to use the Combine function in the Order Entry
screen.
To combine checks, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have several orders created and
are in the Order Entry screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on Combine in the Order Entry screen. This will bring up a screen where you can
select the order you wish to combine.
Select the order you wish to combine with the original order you were using when in Order
Entry. This will bring up the order you wish to combine. You can review it to make sure it is
the correct one before accepting it.
Click Accept. This will actually combine the order with the current order.
Click Done when you are finished combining all the orders required.
Ordering a Half
A customer may only want to order a half order of something. This may be for a child or may be
because they do not want the full dish. To do this, you will only need to click the Half button in the
Order Entry before clicking on the menu item. This will order half of the item and will also cut the
price in half for the item.
Item Details
Before ordering an item, you may want to see what the item looks like or a description of what is in the
item and what comes with the item. You can do this by clicking on the Details button before you
click on the menu item. This will bring up the screen that will show you the picture of the menu item
and the description. There are also options to print the description and order the item. The Add
button will order the item.
Ordering Multiple Quantity
You may want to order more than 1 item of a particular item. Instead of clicking on the menu item
button as many times as needed, you can click on the Quantity button and specify the number of
items you would like to order at once. This will add a line to the ticket that will indicate the item along
with the number you specified.
Dine In Orders
126
Applying Discounts
Discounts are a big part of a restaurant. Specials are going on at various times. Customers may have a
coupon. Managers may give out discounts to frequent customers. Employees may have special pricing
on food from the restaurant. All these scenarios can be covered by discounts. Discounts can be
performed on either the order or the items on the order. More than 1 discount can be applied to the
order. Items can only be discounted once and cannot have multiples discounts applied. You may
however, have 5 items on a check and discount 2 of them as well as discount the entire order. This will
apply the order discount to the items that have not had an item discount applied to them.
To discount an item, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already order items and are
in the Order Entry screen.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the Discounts button in the Order Entry screen. This will bring up a screen that
will allow you to choose what type of discount you would like to use. There are three options.
Discount Order, Discount Item, and Cash Discount.
a. Discount Order will apply the selected discount to any item in the order that does not
already have a discount applied.
b. Discount Item will apply the selected discount to the item selected. You cannot apply
more than 1 discount to an item.
c. Cash Discount will apply a discount that allows you to specify the amount of the
discount manually. You can have a Cash Discount and an Order Discount on the
same check.
Click on the discount type you would like to use. If you choose Discount Order you will be
taken directly to the discounts screen. If you click Discount Item, you will have to select
which item you would like to discount. If you click Cash Discount, you will have to specify
the amount of the discount.
Click Done
Applying Surcharges
Surcharges sometime may need to be applied for various reasons. Surcharges can be for anything you
want. Surcharges can be based on percent or amount and can be waived if a check is over a certain
amount. Surcharges can also be automatically applied to specified order types. If taxes apply to
surcharges, there is an option called Apply Tax on Surcharge. This option is located in Store Settings
> Taxes > [Any Tax]
To add a surcharge to an order, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in Order Entry
screen.
1.
2.
3.
Click on Surcharges. This will bring up the Surcharges screen where you will select a
surcharge.
Select the surcharge you will be adding to the check. You can only apply one surcharge to an
order.
Click Done.
127
Dine In Orders
Applying Credits
Credits are used for various reasons in a restaurant. This can be given to a customer as a birthday gift
or for being a frequent customer of the restaurant. There are two ways to generate a credit in Aldelo
For Restaurants. The first is to issue a credit manually from the Main POS screen using the Credit
button. The second is earning a credit by participating in the frequent diner program.
To apply a credit, follow to steps below. These steps assume you have created a credit for a customer
and are in the Order Entry screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on the Credit button in the Order Entry screen. This will bring up the screen where
you will choose the search method for the customer.
Choose the search method for the customer. There are 4 methods of search.
a. Phone This method is used to search by the customer phone number.
b. Account Code This method is used to search by the account code which is defined
in the customer account information.
c. MSR Card This method is used to search by an MSR card. These can be issued by
the restaurant as a membership card.
d. Customer Name This method is used to search by the customer name. If you search
by the customer name, it will bring up a list of customers that match the name along
with the phone numbers so you can pick the right one.
Provide the information to search for the customer. Once the customer is found, a screen will
appear showing all the credits currently assigned to this customer.
Choose a credit to apply to the order.
a. If the credit is not entirely used, a balance will be kept for later use.
Click Done in the Order Entry screen to save the credit to the order.
Changing the Order Type

If you want to switch this order to a different order type, you can the button with the current order type
name on it. This allows you to change this order from any type to any other type.
To change the order type, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the Order Entry
screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on the button with the current order type name. This is located above the menu items
and to the right of the menu groups. This will bring up a screen allowing you to select the
order type you wish to change this check to.
Choose the new order type.
Enter appropriate information about the order to make the change.
Click Done in the Order Entry screen to save the changes to the check.
Dine In Orders
128
Adding a Customer Name to an Order

If you need to add a customer name to an order, you can use the Customer Name button in Order
Entry
To add a customers name to the check, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the Order
Entry screen
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on the Customer Name button. This will bring up the on screen keyboard allowing
you to enter in anything you want as a customer name.
Enter in the customer name of information you would like associated with this check.
Click Finish
Click Done in the Order Entry screen to save the customer name to the check.
Changing the Number of Guests on the Check

If you need to change the number of guests on the check due to more customers sitting at the table or
some leaving, you can use the Guests button to accomplish this. This button is located at the top of
the menu items in the Order Entry screen.
To change the number of guests at a table for a check, follow the steps below. These steps assume you
are in the in the Order Entry screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on the Guests button in the Order Entry screen. This will bring up a keypad allowing
you to enter the new number of guests sitting at the table.
Enter the number of guests.
Click Enter.
Click Done in the Order Entry screen to save the new number of guests to the check.
Changing the Table Number of the Check

Sometimes customers may want to move to another table. If this happens you will need a way to
change the table number of the check. This can be done using the Table button in the Order Entry
screen. This button is located at the top of the menu items in the Order Entry screen.
To change the table number of the check, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the
Order Entry screen.
1.
2.
3.
Click the Table button in the Order Entry screen. This will bring up the Table Selection
screen.
Select the table you would like to move this check to.
Click Done in the Order Entry screen to save the changes to the check.
129
Dine In Orders
Recall Another Check on the Same Table

If you are working with multiple checks on the same table and need to quickly switch between them,
you can use the Checks button in the Order Entry screen to accomplish this. When you want to
switch to another check you will be able to visually see your checks allowing you to choose
To change the check you are working on for this table, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Checks button in the Order Entry screen. This will bring up the Check Selector
screen where you will be able to see your checks and choose one from the list.
a. You can also create a new check for this table from this screen as well as print either
one check or all the checks.
Highlight the check you want to change to.
Click Edit.
(Optional) If you only want to look at the checks and do want to choose one, click Done.
Changing Seat Numbers in Order Entry

If you want to assign seats to the items ordered, you can do so by using the seat icons as well as the seat
indicator field to do this. Assigning seats to the orders will help the server remember which item goes
to which customer as well as allow for more advanced features such as grouping the items on the guest
check by seat number for easier viewing. There are many features associated with the seats function.
The features associated with the seats functions are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Show Seat Assignment Reminder on Done For Dine In Orders.

Force Seat Assignment Reminder On Done
Prompt Seat Number on Startup
Prompt Seat Number on Each Item.
Smart Seat Handling
Show Total Per Seat
Hide Seat # From Printed Check
To create a seat number for a guest check, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the
Order Entry screen.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the seat icon with a plus sign next to it to increase the seat number you are currently
working with.
Click on the seat icon with a minus sign next to it to decrease the seat number you are
currently working with.
Click on the seat number to show the visual table layout so you can choose which seat you
want to work with without having to use the plus or minus buttons. The seat number field is
directly above the on screen guest check in Order Entry.
Dine In Orders
130
MISC Button
In the Order Entry screen, there is a button called Misc. This button is used to get to more options
that are not commonly used in Order Entry. These functions include:
Change Price
Assign Seats
Clear Order
No Sale
Change Server
Gratuity
Cust. Lookup
Recall Order
Create Labels
Retail Screen
Tax Exempt
No Kitchen / Bar
To Secondary Language
Lock Screens
Change Price
This feature lets you change the price of an item. Only employees with high enough security clearance
can use this feature. To use this feature, click on the Change Price button. A keypad will appear and
prompt you to enter a managers access code. Enter an access code with high enough security clearance
to bring up the Change Price window. Here you will select the items to bring up the Enter New Unit
Price dialog box. Enter the new price and click Enter.
Assign Seats
This feature is only available on Dine In type of orders. It is used to assign ordered items to certain
seats. Click on the Assign Seats button inside the MISC window. The Assign Seats window will
appear with the menu items. Click the item that you want to assign to a seat to bring up the Seat
Assignment window will appear where you can choose the seat that you want to assign that item to.
Once you have picked the seat, you will be brought back to the Assign Seats window were you can
either pick more items or you can click Close to finish with assigning seats.
Clear Order
This feature lets you clear all of the items that have been ordered for this order as long as the order has
not already been sent. Click on the Clear Order button in the MISC window. A confirmation window
will appear allowing you to verify you do want to clear all ordered items.
131
Dine In Orders
No Sale
This will open the cash drawer for an employee with a high enough security clearance. The security
clearance for this feature is located in the Back Office under Security Settings > Access No Sale
Require Manager.
Change Server
This feature lets you change the server that is assigned to an order. Click on the Change Server button
in the Misc window. The Enter New Server Access Code keypad will appear. Enter the access code of
the employee that is going to be taking over this order. Click Enter to complete the change.
Gratuity
This feature lets you add the gratuity to an order. Click on the Gratuity button in the Misc window to
bring up the Gratuity screen. Select Percent, Amount or Difference depending on what type you are
adding.
1.
2.
3.
If you select Percent as the type of gratuity, the Enter Gratuity Percent keypad will appear.
Enter the percent and click Enter to apply the gratuity to the order.
If you select Amount as the type of the gratuity, the Enter Cash Gratuity Amount keypad
will appear. Enter the amount and click Enter to apply the gratuity to the order
If you select Difference as the type of gratuity, the Total Tendered keypad will appear. Enter
the total amount that was tendered and click Enter. This will make the tip amount the
difference between the tendered amount and the amount of the ticket.
Cust. Lookup
This feature allows you to search for customers by Phone, Account Code, MSR Card, or Customer
Name. This will link the order that you are creating to the customers account. Click on the Cust.
Lookup button in the Misc window to bring up the Customer Lookup Type screen. In this popup
window there will be four buttons, Phone, Account Code, MSR Card, and Customer Name. If you are
going to be using the Phone search method, enter the customers phone number. If you are using the
Account Code search method, after you have clicked the Account Code button, enter the account code
in and Click Finish. If you are using the MSR Card search method, after you have clicked the MSR
Card button, swipe the magnetic card through the magnetic card reader. This will bring up the account
specified for this card. If you are using the Customer Name search method, after you have clicked the
Customer Name button, type in the name of the customer and Click the Finish button. After you have
done this, the system will bring up another popup window with a list of all of names that match the
name that was typed in. Choose the customers account to bring up the Review Customer Information
screen. If the information is correct, Click Done. Anytime you type in a phone number and there is no
customer for that number, you will need to create the customer file before you can continue.
Dine In Orders
132
Recall Order
This feature is the same as the Recall button in the Main POS screen. This will bring up the Recall
Order screen allowing you to recall an order.
Create Labels
This feature allows you to create labels for menu items that are ordered by weight. Click on the Create
Labels button to bring up the Weighted Menu Item Label Generator. This screen allows you to select
the menu item and specify the Unit of Measure along with the Expiration Date. Use the on-screen
keyboard if necessary to enter this information. Once you have filled in these fields, enter the total
weight of the menu item. This will calculate the price of the order and display it on-screen.
Retail Screen
This feature allows you to order items by scanning barcodes that you created for them. Click on the
Retail Screen button in the Misc window to bring up the Retail screen. Here you will scan the
barcode and the item will be ordered. If the item has any forced modifiers then the system will allow
you to select them. If you want to void an item, click the Void button and void or reduce items as
normal. For more information on voiding items refer to the Void section of this manual. You can also
add menu modifiers, order by weight if the item is able to do so, or order by quantity by clicking on the
appropriate buttons. When you are ready to exit the Retail screen, you can click the Touch Screen
button to return to the Order Entry screen.
Tax Exempt
This feature allows you to make the current order tax exempt. Click on the Tax Exempt button to
bring up a confirmation screen. Click on the Yes button to make the order tax exempt. If you want to
take a tax exemption off of an order then click on the Tax Exempt button and the system will ask if
you want to remove the Tax Exemption. Click on Yes to remove the tax exemption.
No Kitchen / Bar
This feature allows you to specify whether or not you want this order to be sent to the kitchen\bar. To
use this feature simply click on the No Kitchen\Bar button and Click either Yes or No. This feature is
only active during this session of the order. If you want to suppress the print to the kitchen / bar the
next time you recall this order, you will have to perform this action again.
133
Dine In Orders
To Secondary Language
This feature will change the menu item text to the secondary language. Employees that read two
languages will use this to remember the name of particular menu items they are not familiar with it in
their secondary language.
Lock Screens
This feature allows employees with high enough security clearance to lock or disable all of the features
in the Misc window. Click on the Lock Screens button in the Misc window. A keypad will popup and
prompt you to enter your access code. Enter the access code and click the Enter key. If you entered an
access code with high enough security clearance, the screens will be locked and will not be usable until
someone with high enough security clearance takes off the lock. Follow the same procedures to remove
the lock.
Dine In Orders
134
Modifier System
Menu Items in a restaurant can have many options such as side dishes and preparation instructions.
These options need to be sent to the kitchen and presented to the cooks and the servers in a meaningful
fashion. This will help efficiency as well as help prevent mistakes. There are several ways to work
with modifiers in Aldelo For Restaurants. These are Manual Modifiers, Forced Modifiers, and the
Modifier Builder Templates.
Normal Modifiers
This screen is used for manually changing modifiers that are associated with a menu item. This is
usually used when a mistake has been made during the initial assignment of modifiers using the Forced
Modifiers or the Modifier Builder Template. This can also be used to add a modifier that is not
currently in the system. Use the Split Qty button to split a quantity of items into smaller quantities.
For example, if you have 10 tacos and you want to modify only 3 of them you can highlight the 10
tacos and click Split Qty to tell the system you would like to split 3 off the main group. It will now
show 7 tacos and under that 3 tacos.
To use the Manual Modifier screen, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already
ordered an item in the Order Entry screen.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the Modifiers button in the Order Entry screen. This will bring up the Modifier
screen where you will be able to manipulate modifiers for each menu item.
Select the menu item in the top right corner that you want to work with. Use the arrow keys to
navigate through the menu items.
a. The modifiers currently assigned to the menu item will be shown in the space above
the menu items window.
Select the modifier type you want to work with. These are the buttons below the menu items
window. There are 8 modifier types.
a. No
b. Add
c. Extra
d. Light
e. Exchange
f. Half
g. Bar Mixing
h. Toppings
i. There is also a 9th All button if you would like to see all modifiers in the
system
ii. If you do not want to see all of the modifier types, you can disable the Half,
Toppings, Bar Mixing, and All buttons in Store Settings > Products >
Modifiers.
135
Dine In Orders
4.
5.
Select the first letter of the modifier with the buttons to the left of the modifiers. The button
will ignore the modifier type and only show modifier names that actually start with the letter
you have clicked.
Select the modifiers you want to add to this menu item. Modifiers that are already selected
will be Green and can be unselected if desired.
a. If you want to change the price of the modifier before you add it to the menu item,
you can click the Change Modifier Price button BEFORE clicking the actual
modifier.
b. If you want to order double or triple the modifier, you can use the 2x and 3x
buttons BEFORE you click the modifier.
c.
6.
If you need to add a Note to the menu item, you can use the Note button. This will
prefix the note with the word Note:.
When you have selected all the modifiers you need click Done.
Manual Modifiers
When in the Modifiers screen, you will also be able to create new modifiers on the fly. Use the
Manual Entry to accomplish this task.
To create a new modifier while in the modifiers screen, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click the Manual Entry button. This will bring up the Manual Modifier screen.
Highlight the menu item you want to create a modifier for.
Type the name of the modifier in the Modifier Name field.
(Optional) Type the secondary language name of the modifier in the Sec. Language field.
(Optional) Fill in the additional cost of this modifier in the Additional Cost field.
Click Add
Click Finish.
Forced Modifiers
If you want your employees to have a limited list of modifiers to choose from and provide a path to
follow when selecting the modifiers, you will want to use the Forced Modifier system of Aldelo For
Restaurants.
In order to use the Forced Modifier system, you will first need to setup the forced modifiers in Back
Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Forced Modifiers.
Dine In Orders
136
To use Forced Modifiers, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already created forced
modifiers for the menu items you will be ordering and are in the Order Entry screen..
1.
2.
3.
Select a menu item that has forced modifiers created for it. This will bring up the first level
popup of forced modifiers.
Select a modifier from the first level popup. This will bring up the second level popup of
forced modifiers.
This repeats until there are no more levels or when the 7th level has been reached.
a. You can disable the Finish button in the Forced Modifier Level popup with the
feature called Disable FINISH button in Forced Modifiers This feature can be
found in Store Settings > Products > Modifiers.
Modifier Builder Template

For maximum flexibility and ease of use, modifier builder templates are the way to go for most
restaurants. Modifier builder templates can accomplish the work of forced modifiers as well as create a
very flexible way of presenting the modifiers to the user. Templates also cut down on the amount of
work that needs to be done during setup due to the fact that a template can be assigned to more than 1
menu item.
In order to use the Forced Modifier system, you will first need to setup the forced modifiers in Back
Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Modifier Builder Templates.
To use a modifier builder template, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have created a
builder template for the menu items you will be ordering and are in the Order Entry screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on the menu item that has a modifier builder template assigned to it. This will bring up
the modifier builder template screen.
Click the group you want to work with for this menu item. Only the groups defined for the
template assigned to this menu item will be shown.
Select the modifier type you want to work with. These are the tan/light orange buttons above
the actual modifiers.
a. If you want a certain type selected by default, you can setup this up in the Modifier
Builder Template Setup screen when you edit each category. Use the Default Action
drop down list to choose the default modifier type.
Select the modifier you want to add to this menu item.
a. If you only want to allow an employee to select X number of modifiers, you can set
this option in each builder template category.
b. If you want to force an employee to select at least X number of modifiers, you can set
this option in each builder template category.
c. If you want to change the price of a modifier, you can click the Change Modifier
Price button BEFORE you select the modifier.
d. To remove an already selected modifier, highlight the modifier and click the trash can
icon button. You can also click the modifier again to remove it.
137
Dine In Orders
Pizza Builder System

Pizza restaurants have special requirements when creating an order for a pizza. Since pizzas are so
flexible in their design, Aldelo For Restaurants also needs to be flexible in the way they are ordered.
With the pizza builder screen, creating a custom pizza is very simple. Toppings can be divided amongst
halves, thirds, or quarters. Crusts can be selected as well as how to charge topping prices. There are
many features that affect the pizza builder screen. Some of these features are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Show Pizza Builder Screen

a. This feature will show a menu item as a pizza item in the pizza builder template.
Special Pizza Topping Charges
a. This feature will allow you to specify the number of toppings a pizza will have free
before the normal pizza topping charge goes into affect. This can also be reversed so
that a number of toppings will be charged and then the rest are free.
Proportioned Pizza Topping Charge
a. This feature will charge half price on a topping that is on only half the pizza, a third
on a topping that is on only a third of the pizza, etc.
Half Topping Half Price on EVEN Qty
a. This feature will charge half price for toppings that are used on an evenly divided
pizza. If thirds is used, the normal price will be charged.
Pizza Size Alias Name 1 10
a. This feature will allow you to change the name of the pizza size to whatever you
choose.
Pizza Size Half Topping Price 1 10
a. This feature will allow you to set the half topping price for each pizza size.
In order to use the Pizza Builder screen, you will first need to setup a pizza in the Pizza Builder Setup in
Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup.
To use the pizza builder screen, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have created a pizza
with at least one crust and a couple of toppings and are in the Order Entry screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click on a menu item that has been setup as a pizza item. This will bring up the pizza builder
screen.
Click the type of crust for this pizza.
a. These are the tan/light orange buttons at the top of the pizza builder.
Click on the portion of the pizza you would like to add toppings to. These are the area on the
right side of the screen labeled, Entire Pizza, Half, Third, and Quarter. Once you have clicked
in the area, the selected area will turn while to indicate it is the currently active portion.
Click on the toppings you would like to add to this pizza.
Repeat steps 3 & 4 for each side of the pizza if needed.
(Optional) Click the Normal Charges button to change the way pricing is handled for
toppings on pizza with multiple portions.
Click Done.
Bar Tab Orders
Chapter 9
Bar Tab Orders
138
139
Bar Tab Orders
Order Entry for Bar Tab

In order use the Bar Tab functions in Aldelo For Restaurants, you will need to configure the station to
act like a bar station instead of a server station used to service tables. There are a couple of features that
are designed to make this switch.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enable Bar Tab Services For This Station

(Optional)Skip Table/Bar Tab Selection for Dine In
(Optional)Bar Drink Items will not charge sales tax (Applies to bar order on this station
only)
(Optional)Bar Tab Caption
The feature that needs to be enabled is the Enable Bar Tab Services For This Station. This will show
the bar tab screen allowing you to create orders that are based on a customers name instead of a table
number. Bar Tabs are also kept separately from the table orders and are considered their own order
type in most cases.
Create a New Bar Tab
To create a new order for a bar tab customer, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Dine In in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access code.
Enter your access code. This will bring up an option to select either a Table or Bar Tab type
order.
a. If you want this station to only do bar orders and do not want to choose between
Table and Bar Tab, you can use the option Skip Table/Bar Tab Selection for Dine
In.
Click Bar Tab. This will bring up the screen where you will be able to see all your current bar
tabs as well as create a new bar tab.
a. If you want Bar Tab to show something else, you can use the Bar Tab Caption to
change this.
Enter in a name for this bar tab. You can also use the icon with the two people to enter in
information about this customer if a name is not given.
Click Finish.
The guest check will show the Bar Tab Caption as well as the customer name instead of the table
number.
Bar Tab Orders
140
Setting Up Bar Tab Efficiency

Bar Tenders need to move quickly while they are serving customers and making drinks for other servers
orders. The POS system can potentially be the weakest link in the process if it is not setup properly.
There are several options in Aldelo For Restaurants to make ordering items and editing orders very fast.
Some of these features are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Automatically recognize this stations cashier as the default employee without login.
a. This feature is used for bartenders that will be working alone and do not have to
worry about other people settling orders to the cash drawer. You can also use this
feature to speed up operations with two people working but you will loose the ability
to track which employee has a discrepancy in the cash drawer.
Change Due Screen Time Out Seconds
a. You can use this feature to decrease the number of seconds the change due shows on
this station. This should eliminate the need to click on the Done button after you
give the customer change.
Stay In Order Entry screen after order is finished
a. This feature can be used to always be in the order entry screen. This is useful if you
are not running bar tabs very often and just need to quickly process a transaction from
customers coming up to the bar.
Bar Tab Use Quick Service Order Screen.
a. This feature will change the look of the Order Entry screen and put more options
directly on the Order Entry screen. This screen also has quick cash buttons for
processing cash transactions extremely fast.
Quick Service Screen Auto Log Out Seconds
a. This feature is used to automatically log out an employee after they are finished with
an order and the system returns to the order entry screen automatically using the Stay
In Order Entry screen after order is finished option. This will allow the next
employee to enter their access code and immediate start the next order.
b. MSR cards should be used with this feature so the employee only has to swipe the
card instead of punching in a number.
c. This feature cannot be used with the Automatically recognize this stations cashier
as the default employee without login option.
141
Take Out Orders
Chapter 10
Take Out Orders
Take Out Orders
142
Order Entry for Take Out

The restaurant may offer food for Take Out or To-Go. For these types of orders, a customer phone
number might want to be associated with the customer so the order can be tracked in case of a no show
or if you want to track the customers order history.
There are several features that can affect the way Take Out orders will behave. Some of these features
are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Require Phone # For Take Out

a. This feature will require that a phone number must be entered before the employee is
allowed to place the order.
i. If you want to require that the system checks the format of the phone number
so the employee cannot enter a wrong phone number, you can use the feature
called Enforce Exact Telephone Number Digits. This will force the
employee to enter a phone number that matches the Telephone Display
Format in Store Settings > General
Take Out / Delivery Show Search Type
a. This feature will show other options for looking up customer information when
creating a new Take Out order. These options are:
i. Phone Number
ii. Account Number
iii. MSR Card
iv. Customer Name
Do Not prompt user to enter customer phone number for take out on this station
a. This feature will disable the prompt to search for a customer completely. You will
not be required to enter in a phone number and will be taken directly to the order
entry screen.
New Customer Take Out On Hold
a. This feature will place the order on hold until the hold is manually removed from the
order for customers not in the system.
143
Take Out Orders
Creating a New Take Out Order

To create a new Take Out order, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Take Out on the Main POS screen. This will bring up either a keypad or a method to
search with depending on if you have the Take Out / Delivery Show Search Type feature
enabled.
Enter the phone number or choose the search type and enter information for that customer.
This will take you to the Customer Information screen.
Enter all the information about the customer in this screen.
a. If this customer is already in the system, this information should already be filled in.
If the customer has previous orders, you will be able to view those orders with the
Order History button.
Click Finish.
Drive Thru Orders
Chapter 11
Drive Thru Orders
144
145
Drive Thru Orders
Order Entry for Drive Thru

If your restaurant has a drive thru window you may want to use the drive thru features of Aldelo For
Restaurants. There are many unique functions to drive thru establishments especially when it comes to
timing and order handling. There are many features that affect how drive thru will behave. Some of
these features are:
1.
2.
3.
Disable Drive Thru Timing Feature

a. This will completely disable the drive thru functions in Aldelo For Restaurants. This
feature is commonly used to allow the Drive Thru button to be used for another
order type. If this is the case, you will also want to change the Alias Name of the
Drive Thru order type.
Drive Thru Orders Use Drive Thru Stations.
a. This feature will only allow stations marked as drive thru stations to edit orders or
settle orders. If the station is not a drive thru station, the user will be prompted to go
to a drive thru station to perform the recall or settle process.
b. To make a station a drive thru station, you can use the feature called Mark this
station as a drive thru station. This can be found in Station Settings > Other
Options.
Mark this station as a drive thru station.
a. This feature will designate this station as allowed to be used for drive thru orders.
Creating a New Drive Thru Order

To create a new drive thru order, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
Click on Drive Thru in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you to enter your access
code.
Enter your access code. This will take you to the Drive Thru timing screen.
a. This screen only shows up if a drive thru order has been settled but not marked as
complete meaning that the order has not yet been given to the customer at the drive
thru window. Once the order is marked as complete, it will not show up in the Drive
Thru timing screen.
Click New Order. This will take you to the Order Entry screen.
Marking a Drive Thru Order as Complete

Once the order has been settled, it will show up in the Drive Thru timing screen. You will want to mark
this order as complete only after the customer has been given all their food and has driven away. To do
this, simply highlight the order in the Drive Thru Timing screen and click Mark Complete.
Delivery Orders
Chapter 12
Delivery Orders
146
147
Delivery Orders
Order Entry for Delivery

If your restaurant is going to do deliveries, you will want to make use of the Delivery features in Aldelo
For Restaurants. There are many unique features for delivery in regards to assigning the order to an
employee for delivery and tracking that delivery. There are many features that will affect how a
delivery order will behave. Some of these features are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Show Driver Dispatch Screen

a. This screen will show a list of drivers with another list showing the orders that are
ready for delivery. By default the employee will have to enter their access code, click
departure and then select the orders they want to take. With the Driver Dispatch
screen, all this is located in one screen.
Enable Driver Money Drop
a. This feature will allow an employee to settle all cash orders in one transaction. In
order to use this feature, you will have to settle all credit cards and checks before
performing a money drop.
Enable Popup Streets
a. This feature will enable a screen to popup with a list of streets when a street name is
typed in the delivery address of the customer. This list will be filtered as you type
more of the street name effectively reducing the list to match what you have already
typed.
Round Delivery Total To Next Quarter
a. This feature will round the total of the guest check to the nearest quarter to make it
easier for the driver to carry change when the customer pays for the order. This will
always round up.
Delivery Charge
a. This is the amount that will be charged the customer for performing the delivery. The
Delivery Charge will be assigned in the following order and will use the first value it
finds.
i. Customer Record
ii. Street
iii. Postal Code
iv. Global Setting in Store Settings > Services > Delivery
v. (Optional) Menu Item level delivery charge overrides all of the above.
Delivery Comp
a. This is the amount that will be given to the employee for performing the delivery.
The Delivery Comp will be assigned in the following order and will use the first value
it finds.
i. Customer Record
ii. Street
iii. Postal Code
iv. Global Setting in Store Settings > Services > Delivery
v. (Optional) Menu Item level delivery comp overrides all of the above.
Chained Delivery Charge/Comp Per Trip
a. This feature will only charge the delivery charge and compensation on the first order
in a chain of orders.
Delivery Orders
148
8.
Delivery Charge/Comp Per Menu Item

a. This feature will charge the delivery charge and comp based on the value defined at
the menu item level.
9. Delivery Charge Percent Based
a. This feature will charge the amount in the delivery charge field as a percent instead of
as an actual amount.
10. Delivery Comp Percent Based
a. This feature will charge the amount in the delivery comp field as a percent instead of
as an actual amount.
11. Apply Tax on Delivery Charge
a. This will apply a tax to a delivery charge.
12. MapPoint Enabled
a. This will enable advanced routing and mapping features for delivery orders.
Creating a Delivery Order

To create a delivery order, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Delivery in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access code.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the keypad for customer phone number or the
screen allowing you to choose which search type you want to use. This option depends on the
Take Out / Delivery Show Search Type feature in Store Settings > Staff / CRM.
Enter the phone number or the click on the search type and enter the appropriate information to
find the customer. This will bring up the Customer Information screen
Enter the customers information. If this customer is in the database, the information should
already be filled in.
a. If this customer has previous orders, you will be able to pull up those orders and
automatically create a new order based on their history with one click.
Click Finish.
149
Delivery Procedures
Chapter 13
Delivery Procedures
Delivery Procedures
150
Assigning a Delivery Order

There are two ways in Aldelo For Restaurants to assign a delivery to a driver. The first is the default
way which is requiring each driver to enter their access code to assign a delivery order to themselves.
The other method is using a driver dispatch screen to show all the drivers and orders on one screen
allowing easy assignment quickly. The driver dispatch screen is mainly used when the station is going
to be dedicated to assigning orders to drivers who are coming and going.
Using the Default Delivery Assignment Procedures
To assign an order to a driver using the default method, follow the steps below. These steps assume a
delivery order has already been created.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Driver in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access code.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the Driver Tracking screen with the current
employees name at the top.
Click Departure. This will bring up the Driver Departure Order Assignment screen.
Highlight the order(s) you are going to take and click select. Use the arrow buttons to navigate
the orders. You can also scan the guest check with a barcode scanner to select the order.
a. Barcodes will only be printed on the guest check if you are using an Epson TMT88II/III printer.
Click Departure.
Driver Dispatch screen Assignment Procedures.

To assign an order to a driver using the Driver Dispatch screen, follow the steps below. These steps
assume a delivery order has already been created.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Driver in the Main POS screen. This will bring you to the Driver Dispatch screen.
Highlight the name of the driver that will be taking this delivery.
a. Only employees that are clocked in and designated as drivers will be shown in this
screen.
Select the orders this driver is going to take.
Click Departure. This will assign the order(s) to the driver.
a. If you accidentally assign an order to the wrong driver, you can click the Also Show
Assigned Orders button to show orders assigned to other drivers. You can then
assign the order to the correct driver.
(Optional) Click Done. You can stay in this screen if this station is dedicated to assigning
orders to drivers.
151
Delivery Procedures
Using Delivery Directions and Route Planning

If your drivers need driving directions, you will want to use the MapPoint integration. This replaces the
Microsoft Streets and Trips integration but provides backward compatibility with Streets and Trips. In
order to make use of this integration, Microsoft MapPoint 2004 must be installed on the system that will
be used to view the driving directions. If more than one system will be used for this purpose, a copy of
Microsoft MapPoint must be installed on those stations.
MapPoint Integration Setup
To setup Microsoft MapPoint Integration, follow the steps below
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install Microsoft MapPoint on all systems that will use driving direction and route planning
functions.
Enable the feature called MapPoint Enabled. Do this by typing YES into the field when
editing the option. This feature can be found in Back Office > Help > Technical Support >
F10. The following features can also be found on the same page.
Fill in the current fuel cost in your local area. This feature is call MapPoint Fuel Cost.
Fill in the address where the deliveries will depart from. This feature is called MapPoint
Home Address. The format MUST BE [Street Address], [City], [State][ZipCode]. If this
information is wrong, MapPoint will fail to start.
Enable the feature called Optimize Way Points. This will calculate the fastest route when
delivering several orders.
Fill in the number of minutes on average it will take for the items to be prepared for delivery in
the MapPoint Route Start Minutes After field. The system uses this information plus the
calculated route time to estimate the time of delivery. The estimated delivery time will show
on the driving directions.
Using MapPoint Integration

To use the MapPoint Integration, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already setup
MapPoint integration, have created a delivery order, and are in the Driver Dispatch screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on the driver you want to assign the order to.

Click on the order(s) you wish to take for delivery.
Click See Map This will bring up the Route Planning screen. You will be able to print the
directions as well as print the actual map from this screen.
Click Print Map or Print Detail. These will print out on the desktop printer. These will
NOT use the receipt printer.
Click Done.
Delivery Procedures
152
Viewing Delivery Order Status

If you want to keep an eye on the progress of all delivery orders, you will want to use the Delivery
Status screen. This screen is accessed from the Main POS screen and is mainly used by managers to
keep track of their drivers.
Using the Delivery Status screen
To use the Delivery Status screen, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already created
a delivery order.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the Delivery Status button in the Main POS screen.

Information that can be viewed on this screen is the order #, time the order was created,
address to be delivered to, driver, departure time, time the order was in the store, time it has
taken up to this point to deliver the order.
a. You can also see the driving directions of a delivery if using the MapPoint
Integration.
Once an order has arrived, it will be removed from this list.
153
Quick Service
Chapter 14
Quick Service
Quick Service
154
Using the Quick Service Screen

The quick service screen has many adjustments over the normal order entry screen to cater to faster
operations while taking orders. For example, there are Qty buttons readily available for the most
common quantities and quick cash amounts which calculate the most common tenders given
depending on what the Amount Due is. This is great for pure cash transactions.
Many of the operational buttons are also displayed in plain view for the Quick Service screen. This
eliminates one more button click needed to get to these buttons in the normal screen. The modifier
builder template is also incorporated into this screen so when it is needed, it will simply replace the
operational buttons instead of using a popup which reduces the number of clicks by 1.
The Quick Service screen also has an auto-logout feature which will automatically log off a user once
they have completed an order. You can also manually do this by clicking the Change Server button.
155
Recall Procedures
Chapter 15
Recall Procedures
Recall Procedures
156
Recall Operations
There are many ways to recall an order so that it may be edited. You will want to recall an order to add
more items, change the order type, add more guests, etc. Any time an order needs to be changed, the
recall function is used. Some of the ways to recall an order are the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Recall button in the Main POS screen

Clicking on an occupied table when in the Table Selection screen.
Clicking on the Recall button while in the Order Selection screen when choosing an order to
settle.
Clicking the Checks button and selecting a check to edit in Order Entry.
Click the Recall button in the MISC screen in Order Entry.
The most common methods of recall are the Recall button in the Main POS screen and clicking on an
occupied table when in the Table Selection screen. This will only cover the Recall button in the Main
POS screen since it is the main way to recall an order.
To recall and order, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already created and order.
1.
2.
3.
Click Recall in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access code.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the Recall Order screen.
Select the Order Type you would like to filter by. This will reduce the number of orders
displayed on the screen at once. This will also show specific information about this order in
regards to the order type.
4. (Optional) If you want to see all employees orders, click the My Orders button. This will
turn OFF the filter for only showing orders created by you.
5. (Optional) If you want to see orders that have been settled, click the Open Orders button.
This will turn OFF the filter to only show open orders.
6. (Optional) Scan the barcode on the guest check.
a. The barcode will only print on the guest check if you have an Epson TM-T88 II/III
7. (Optional) Click on Show List if you want to see all the orders in a list instead of as buttons.
8. (Optional) Click Print if you only want to print the order instead of actually recalling it.
9. Click the order you want to recall. This will bring up the order in the Recalled Order screen.
a. There are four options on this screen. Edit, Print, Rush Order and Pager.
10. Click Edit Order. This will bring up the order entry screen with the orders information.
Batch Transfer
While in the Recall Order Selection screen, you can also batch transfer all orders assigned to you to
another server. This is useful when ending a shift and you have open orders still assigned to you. Click
the Batch Transfer button next to the Total Orders Count information. Enter the access code of the
new server. All orders will transfer to the new server automatically.
157
Void Procedures
Chapter 16
Void Procedures
Void Procedures
158
Void Operations
If an order needs to be voided for any reason, you will want to use the void functions in Aldelo For
Restaurants. Only certain employees should have access to voiding an order. If all employees can void
an order, there is temptation to take advantage of the system and give free food to friends and family.
There are many ways to void and order in the system. This section will only cover the Main POS
button Void.
To void an order, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have an order created and have
inventory depletion turned on.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click on the Void button in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access
code.
Enter you access code. This will bring up the screen to select an order that is to be voided.
a. This screen is almost identical to the recall screen and is used in the same fashion.
Select the order to be voided or enter the order number in the Quick Search field. This will
bring up the Void Reason screen.
Enter a reason for voiding this order. This will bring up a screen asking if you want to notify
the kitchen or bar about the void operation.
a. If you use the same reasons over and over, you will want to create quick void reasons
in Store Settings > Order Entry.
Click Yes or No. This will bring up a screen asking if this void is going to cause waste or
no waste.
Click Waste or No Waste
a. Waste will deplete the inventory due to this item being thrown away.
b. No Waste will NOT deplete the inventory due to this item being voided before the
inventory was used to make the item.
159
Cashier Procedures
Chapter 17
Cashier Operations
Cashier Procedures
160
No Sale
This function will open the cash drawer. There is a security setting to control which employees can
perform this action as well as a feature to take pictures of the person using a webcam.
Pay Out
The Pay Out button in the Main POS screen is used anytime a payout is performed. Payouts can
come in several forms.
General Payout
General Payouts are used for things like paying for items that were purchased at the store when an
inventory items runs out and needs to be replaced right away or a vendor needs to be paid with cash.
To perform a general payout, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on the Payout button in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access
code.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the Pay Out Type screen.
Select the General payout type. This will bring up the General Pay Out screen.
Enter the Pay Out To, Amount, and Description information.
Click Finish
Wage Advance
Sometimes employees need money in emergency situations. To give them money prior to receiving
their normal pay, you can use the Wage Advance option in pay outs to accomplish this.
To perform a wage advance, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
code.
Select the Wage Advance payout type. This will bring up the Select Employee screen.
Choose the employee you wish to give advance pay to. This will bring up the Employee Wage
Advance screen.
Enter the Amount and Description for the wage advance.
Click Finish
When the employee receives their normal pay, the wage advance will automatically be deducted from
their payroll.
161
Cashier Procedures
Manager Cash Out

This feature allows the manager to take money out of the cash register without reducing the cashiers
liability amount. This is used to take cash out of the cash drawer and place it in a safe in the event that
the cash drawer has too much cash stored in the drawer.
To perform a manager cash out, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
code.
Select the Manager Cash Out payout type. This will bring up a keypad allowing you to enter
the amount that will be removed from the drawer. This will print out two receipts with the
amount and a space for the manager signature.
.Have the manager sign both copies and place one with the cash removed, and the other inside
the cash drawer.
a. When counting the cash drawer at the end of the night, be sure to count the cash out
receipt as part of the drawer amount.
Issuing Refunds
If a customer needs to be refunded money for any reason, the refund function of Aldelo For Restaurants
needs to be used.
To perform a refund, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Refund in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access code.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the Refund screen.
(Optional) Enter the order number that this refund applies to.
Enter the Refund Amount, Reason, and Refund Method.
a. If you have integrated credit card processing enabled, you will be able to issue a
credit to the customers credit card.
Click Finish.
Gift Card Procedures
Chapter 18
162
163
Issuing Gift Cards

Gift cards are a very important aspect of running a restaurant. They provide a means of creating
customer loyalty and creating a way to new customers to be introduced to your restaurant. When a
customer purchases a gift card, it is a good sign that they will be returning for a second visit. It may
also be an indication that the gift card may be used as a gift to someone they know and wish to expose
that person to your restaurants food and atmosphere. Gift Cards are always well received by people and
are considered a good way to advertise your restaurant to others.
There are many functions that can be performed with gift cards. Issuing, recharging, multiple
simultaneous purchases, and checking balances.
To issue a gift card, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have sign in as a cashier.
1.
Click on the Gift Certificate button in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your
access code.
2. Enter your access code. This will bring up the Gift Certificate screen.
3. (Optional) / (Required if Account Number is not used): Swipe the gift card through the MSR
reader while in the MSR Card field.
4. (Optional) / (Required if MSR card is not used): Enter the account number of the card or
certificate. This is the number on the card or certificate.
a. The Account Number will be the number you used to redeem the card if MSR is not
used.
5. (Optional) Enter the expiration date of the card or certificate. Use the / button to divide the
date.
6. (Optional) Enter the Issued To and Presented by fields.
7. Enter the Total Amount that the gift card will be worth.
8. (Optional) Enter a discount amount.
a. This will be used to charge the customer less than what the gift card is valued at. If
you discount the whole amount, the gift card will be free of charge.
9. (Optional) Click Add to create another card that will be paid for in this transaction. You can
create as many cards as you wish in one transaction.
a. Repeat steps 3 9 for every card you need to create in this transaction.
10. Select the Payment Type.
a. If you use integrated credit card processing, you can use a credit card to pay for this
transaction.
11. Enter the amount received.
12. Click Finish. This will print out the gift certificate receipt with the certificate number on it.
164
Recharging Gift Cards

Gift cards can be reused and are often used like a secured credit card. If the customers balance is low,
you can offer to recharge the gift card to add more value to the card.
To recharge the gift card, follow the steps below. These steps assume a gift card has already been
created and the gift card or gift card account number is available.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click on the Gift Certificate button in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your
access code.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the gift certificate screen.
Click the Recharge button. This will bring up a screen asking if you would like to search for
the gift card by MSR number / ID number or Account number.
a. MSR number is the number on the magnetic strip of the MSR card.
b. The ID number is the Internal Number of the gift card or certificate.
c. The account number is the number that the system uses for its own tracking if an
internal ID number is not used.
Select Yes or No.
a. Yes will search by MSR Card or ID
b. No will search by Account Number.
Swipe or enter the information of the gift card or certificate.
Process the gift card as if it is a new transaction. This will add the amount charged to the
existing gift card or certificate.
Checking Balances
If a customer would like to check the balance of their card before using it or they are just curious, you
can swipe the card while in the Main POS screen to have the balance display on the screen.
165
Order Settlement Procedures
Chapter 19
166
Cashier Settle Operations

If you are signed in as a cashier, you will be able to settle orders to your cash drawer. If you are not the
cashier, you will have to go to the cashier to have your orders settled for you. The only exception to
this is if you are using Staff Bank. You must have a cash drawer open on a station before you can settle
any orders. There are many aspects to settling an order and there are several ways in which orders can
be settled.
Settling in the Main POS screen

One of the commonly used methods of settling is through the Main POS screen Settle button. This
button is used by the cashier to perform settlement operations on any order in the system.
To settle an order using the Settle button in the Main POS screen, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the Settle button in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access
code.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the Select Order To Settle screen.
a. This screen is very similar to the recall screen and performs many of the same
functions.
Click on the order you wish to settle. This will bring up the Settle Order screen.
a. This screen has many options to choose from.
i. Cash
ii. Check
iii. Credit Card
1. If integrated credit card processing is used, the process for settling
orders will change for this type of payment.
iv. Gift Certificate
v. House Account
vi. Complimentary
vii. Room Charge
1. This button will only show if hotel integration is turned on.
viii. Gratuity
ix. Print
x. Discount
xi. Split
xii. Combine
167
Cash
For cash payment types click on the Cash button. A dialog box will appear and prompt you to enter
the amount tendered. On the right side of this window are some estimated amounts that may be
tendered. If you want to use one of these, click on the button that has the amount that you want. If you
dont see the amount that you want, manually enter in the amount that was tendered. Once you have the
amount that needs to be tendered, click Enter to finish the settlement.
Check
If the customer is paying by check, click on the Check button. This will take you to the Check Scan
feature. Here you will enter the bank routing number in the Bank Routing field. You can either enter it
from the keyboard or you can click on the button with a keyboard on it. This will bring up the key pad
so that you can enter the number on a touch screen. If you make a mistake and you want to erase the
number, click on the button with a pencil eraser and this will erase the number. The next field is the
Checking Account Number field. Here you can enter the checking account number. The last field is
the Drivers License Number field. Here you can enter the customers Drivers License information.
Once you have entered all of the information, Click the Verify button. The system will then prompt
you to enter the amount that was tendered. Enter the amount that was tendered to complete this
transaction.
Credit Card
If a customer is paying by credit card there are two ways to settle this order. One is without integrated
credit card processing where the order is treated as if the processing is done on bank terminal. The
software will assume that the transaction has been successfully processed and will just ask the user how
much the transaction was for. The other way is when credit card processing is integrated. This will
bring up the Credit Card Processing screen allowing the user to process the credit card directly through
Aldelo for Restaurants.
ATM / Debit Card
If the customer wishes to pay with their ATM / Debit card, you can use this option. Since this type of
transaction is not currently supported, it will simply prompt you to enter the amount that was processed
on the Bank Terminal.
168
Gift Certificate
If the customer is using a Gift Certificate to pay for their meal, click on the Gift Certificate button. This
will bring up the screen asking how you would like to search for the Gift Card or Certificate. Choose
the method and enter the information required. The balance will also be shown on the receipt after the
customer has paid with a Gift Certificate.
House Account
In House Charge Accounts can be used to settle orders for customers that have an In House Charge
Account with the restaurant. These can be setup in Operations > In House Charge > Maintain In House
Accounts.
To settle using House Account, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already created a
house account for this customer.
Click the House Acct button.
Choose the lookup type to find the customers account.
Enter in the customers information depending on what lookup type you chose.
Review the Customers Information.
Select Yes or No when it asks if you want to charge it to the customers account.
Enter the amount you would like to charge to the account.
Complementary
This will allow the user to Comp the meal and enter any amount they wish to Discount. This is useful
to managers wishing to discount meals with an exact amount. This button can also have a security
placed on it so not all employees have access to it. All complimentary discounts will be treated as Cash
Discounts. They will also show up in the reports as such.
Room Charge
This will allow the user to charge an order to a room when the hotel integration is enabled.
Settling in the Order Entry screen
When using the Settle button in the Order Entry screen, the order will be sent to the kitchen while at the
same time, taking you to the Settle screen. This screen is exactly the same as the Settle screen when
using the Settle button in the Main POS screen.
169
Settling Using Staff Bank

When an employee is using Staff Bank, their settlement options change a bit. In the Order Entry screen,
the Cash Tender and Settle buttons become a Staff Bank button. When this button is clicked, you
are taken to the Settle screen allowing you to settle the order to your staff bank. You will also have an
option to Pay to Staff Bank in the Recalled Order screen.
To settle using the Order Entry screen method, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in
the Order Entry screen and have the order you wish to settle open.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the Staff Bank button. This will bring you to the Settle Order screen.
Click on the payment method you wish to use. This will prompt you to enter the amount.
Enter the amount the customer is providing and click . This will bring up the Change Due
screen.
a. If you are using Frequent Diner tracking, you can click Freq Diner Track in the
Change Due screen.
To settle using the Recall Order method, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have created
an order.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Recall in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access code.
Click on the order you wish to recall. This will bring up the Recalled Order screen.
Click on Pay To Staff Bank. This will bring up the Settle Order screen.
From here you can settle the order like you normally would.
Settling Using Driver Money Drop

If you are using the Driver Money Drop feature, you will need to pay all orders that are not cash before
using the money drop. Since Credit Cards and Checks are not supported with the money drop feature,
these will need to be settled separately.
To use the Driver Money Drop feature, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have delivered
orders, are using the Driver Dispatch screen and need to settle the orders
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Make sure you have settled any orders that have been paid by check.
Make sure you have settled any orders that have been paid by credit card.
a. These two steps must be completed before using the money drop feature.
Click on Driver in the Main POS screen. This will bring up the Driver Dispatch screen.
Highlight your name and click Money Drop. This will prompt for an access code of the staff
bank or cashier that will be receiving this payment.
a. If the driver is using Staff Bank, they should enter their access code.
b. If the driver is paying to a cashier, the cashier should enter their access code.
You will see the Driver Money Drop Report. You can either print this out or click OK.
You will be shown a confirmation of the orders being settled to the Staff Bank or Cash
Drawer.
Closing Procedures
Chapter 20
Closing Procedures
170
171
Closing Procedures
Closing the Cash Drawer

When all orders have been settled, the cash drawer will need to be counted and closed from the system.
To sign out a cashier, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have closed all orders.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click the Cashier Out button in the Main POS screen and enter your access code
This will bring up the Select Cash Tray for Cashier Sign Out selection screen. Select the cash
tray that you will be signing out.
(Optional)This will bring up the Adjust Gratuity Screen. This is where all the gratuities for
each order can be adjusted. To adjust the gratuity, highlight the order and click Adjust
Gratuity.
(Optional)This will bring up the Gratuity Amount screen allowing you to enter the amount.
(Optional)After the amount is entered, you will be able to process the tip and continue on to
the next order or on to the Money Count screen.
The Money Count screen will appear with all of the charges and checks that were taken.
Verify all checks and charges and check them off in the Money Count screen. You will also
want to enter in all of the cash that was in the drawer. This includes Manager Cash Out
receipts.
When you have finished, click the Finish button. If there was a discrepancy in the drawer,
the Register Discrepancy screen will appear and show the discrepancy amount. Enter a reason
for the discrepancy and click the Accept button. This will deactivate the cash register
features for this station.
Tech Tip: All Credit Card Tips should be removed before completing the Cashier
Sign Out process. If you leave the credit card tips in the drawer, the drawer will be
over the amount of the tips.
Closing Procedures
172
Quick Sign Out

When a cashier needs to quickly switch a drawer or switch to another station, they can use the Quick
Sign Out feature. This feature is useful if you want to switch out a drawer during a busy night and sign
it back in at a station that is located in a managers office for safe counting of the money. This can be
thought of as an easy way of relocating a cash tray to another station for any reason.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click the Cashier Out button in the Main POS screen and enter your access code
This will bring up the Select Cash Tray for Cashier Sign Out selection screen. Select the cash
tray that you will be signing out.
(Optional) Click Done to bypass the gratuity screen.
Click Cancel on the Money Count Screen.
Select Quick Sign Out (No Money Count Performed).
After the cash tray has been through a quick sign out, the cash tray will be available for a quick
sign in. Only the employee that did the Quick Sign Out will be able to sign the tray back in.
Select the Revert Quick Cashier Out button to activate this cash tray once again for this
employee on this station.
173
Closing Procedures
Closing Your Staff Bank

If you used Staff Bank during the day instead of a cash drawer, you will need to close your staff bank.
To be able to close your staff bank, you should have already closed all your orders or transferred them
to another server.
To end your staff bank, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already closed all your
orders and do not have any open orders outstanding.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click on Time Card in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access code.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the Employee Time Card screen.
Click on End Staff Bank. This will bring up the Staff Bank Liability Report.
a. You can either print this out or click OK to go the next screen.
Click OK. This will bring up the Money Count screen.
Enter the amount of each denomination you will be turning in.
Click Finish. This will bring up the Money Count Conformation screen.
Click Yes or No to either complete this transaction or go back to edit the amounts.
Once you have closed your staff bank, you will most likely want to check with the shift manager to go
over the Staff Bank Liability Report to make sure your amounts are correct.
Closing Procedures
174
Clocking Out
To clock out, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are already clocked in and all your orders
are settled.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the Time Card button in the Main POS screen. This will ask you for your access
code.
Enter your access code. This will take you to the Employee Time Card screen with the name
of the employee that is accessing this screen and their job title.
Click Clock Out. This will show your clock out time.
a. If you still have open orders, you will be asked to transfer them to another server.
Running A Closing Report

This gives you a report of all the sales and other important closing information about your restaurant for
the report date. The closing report should be run every day and MUST be run if the inventory system is
used.
To run a Closing Report, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have closed all orders, closed
all cash drawers and staff banks, and everyone has clocked out.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click on Operations in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access code.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the Operations Center.
Click on Revenue Center. This will bring up the Revenue Center screen.
Click on Closing Report. This will prompt you to select a date on which to report.
Use the Year, Month and Day buttons to select the data you wish to report on and click
Select.
This will prompt asking if you wish to review the access denied logs. Click Yes or No.
a. If you have not closed all your cash drawers and staff banks, you will be informed of
which banks are still open and what their number is. These will need to be closed
before this is a final report.
The Closing Report will be shown. You can either print this or just view it and click OK.
a. Several sections of the closing report are turned off by default. If it is desired to see
these sections you will need to change the value of the registry to YES or NO
depending on your desired result.
i. Daily Closing Hide Employee Time Cards
ii. Daily Closing Hide Gratuity Recap
iii. Daily Closing Show Tender Details
175
Manager Operations
Chapter 21
Manager Operations
Manager Operations
176
Time Cards
Editing Time Cards
When employees make mistakes on their time cards, the time card may need to be adjusted to reflect the
correct time. This is done by editing the time card in the Edit Unpaid Time Cards screen.
To edit unpaid time cards, follow the steps below. These steps assume an employee has clocked in and
out at least once.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click on Time Cards in the Main POS screen. This will bring up the Employee Time Card
screen with your name at the top. If you are a manager, you will have the rights to click on
Edit Time Cards.
Click Edit Time Cards. This will bring up the Edit Unpaid Time Cards screen.
On the left, highlight the employee name that has a time card that needs to be changed.
Below the employee name list, highlight the date you wish to edit. This will bring up this time
card so that is may be edited.
Click inside the Clock In Time field to turn it green when the field is green, the field is
active and can be edited.
Use the Hour, Minutes, and Date buttons to change the time in the field.
Click and edit each field you need to change.
Click Save. This will prompt confirming the changes.
Orders
Reverting or Re-Opening an Order
If an order has been closed and needs to be re-opened, you can revert the order and change its status
back to open. This will allow you to make changes to the order. This is a manager only function and
should be protected from normal employees.
To revert a closed order, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have created an order and
settled it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Recall in the Main POS screen. This will prompt you for your access code.
Click Open Order. This will change the button to All Order which will show orders that
have been settled. By default closed orders are not shown.
Click the order you wish to revert. This will bring up the Recalled Order screen.
Click the Re-Open Check button. This will prompt for a managers access code.
a. The security for this is called Access Daily Closing Report and it located in Back
Office > Security Settings.
177
Manager Operations
6.
7.
8.
Enter a manager access code. This will prompt you to confirm that you would like to re-open
the check.
Click Yes. This will confirm the check was re-opened.
You will now see that the check is able to be edited and has a Partial Payment status set.
a. The Partial Payment status is because the payment is still applied to the order but it is
no longer closed.
You are now able to treat this order like a normal order. If you need to change the amount paid, you
will first need to remove the current payment from the order. Do this by clicking on the Red button
next to the payment.
Cash Drawers
Reverting or Re-Opening a Cash Drawer
If you have closed a cash drawer and need to make adjustments to it, you can revert the cash drawer
back to an open status. You will only be able to revert cash drawers that are less than 2 days old. If it is
3 days old, you will not be able to revert it for any reason.
To revert a cash drawer, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have closed a cash drawer or
Staff Bank and it is less than 2 days old.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the Operations Center screen.
Click on the Re-Open Cashier button. This will prompt to confirm the revert operation.
Click Yes. This will bring up a screen allowing you to select the bank you wish to re-open.
Click on the bank you wish to re-open. This will prompt to confirm the operation.
a. Make sure you have the correct bank by referring to the Liab. # on the buttons.
Cross reference this by using the Bank Liability option in Revenue Center.
Click Yes to confirm the operation.
Manager Operations
178
Operations Center
Receive Payments Section
This section is used for receiving different types of payments. In this section there are three different
choices for receiving payments. Below are descriptions of what each of these choices do and how to
use them.
Pay In House Charges
This feature is used to collect payments on In House Charge Accounts
To make payments on In House Charge Accounts, follow the steps below. These steps assume you
have already created a customer account, created an In House Charge account and paid an order using
the In House Charge account.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on the Pay In House Charges button. This will bring up a search screen where you can
choose the method to search by
Choose the search method to find the customers account. This will bring up the screen where
you can make payments.
Review the orders that will be paid. You can select them and print them out for the customer
to review as well. These statements will print out on the receipt printer.
Select the payment type and enter the amount that was tendered. The change due screen will
appear and show the change that is due (if any). This will pay off the charges in the order in
which they were placed. This means that the oldest orders will be paid first.
Pay Bad Checks

This feature lets you collect payments on Bad Checks that may have been written to your restaurant.
To receive payment for a bad check, follow the steps below. These steps assume a bad check as been
created.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Pay Bad Checks. This will bring up a screen allowing you to select the check you
wish to receive payment on.
Click on the check you need to receive payment on. This will bring up detailed information
about the check with options on how it is to be paid.
b. You can also click the Details button for even more information regarding the
check.
Select a payment source from the Payment Source drop down list.
Select a payment method from the Payment Method drop down list.
Click Finish.
179
Manager Operations
Auto Pay All Open Deliveries

This feature allows you to pay all of the open delivery orders to the cashier using Cash as the form of
payment.
To use this feature you must first have the Blind Cashier Close Out box checked. You can find this
option in the Back Office under Store Settings > Revenue > Cashier. The system will assume that all of
the orders were paid in full for the correct amounts using cash.
To automatically pay all open deliveries, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have created
delivery orders and have delivered them. They also assume you have checked the option named Blind
Cashier Close Out in Store Settings > Revenue > Cashier.
1.
2.
Click on the Auto Pay All Open Deliveries button. This will bring up a confirmation
window asking if you want to pay all delivery orders to the cashier.
Click Yes or No.
Revenue Center Section

This section is used to do various types of revenue collection and organization. Below are subsections
for each of the features in the Revenue Center with descriptions on what each feature does and how to
use it. You can access the Revenue Center by Clicking on the Operations button in the Main POS
screen and going to Revenue Center.
Manager Operations
180
Closing Report
This gives you a report of all the sales and other important closing information about your restaurant for
the report date. The closing report should be run every day and MUST be run if the inventory system is
used.
To run a Closing Report, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have closed all orders, closed
all cash drawers and staff banks, and everyone has clocked out.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the Operations Center.
Click on Closing Report. This will prompt you to select a date on which to report.
Use the Year, Month and Day buttons to select the data you wish to report on and click
Select.
This will prompt asking if you wish to review the access denied logs. Click Yes or No.
b. If you have not closed all your cash drawers and staff banks, you will be informed of
which banks are still open and what their number is. These will need to be closed
before this is a final report.
The Closing Report will be shown. You can either print this or just view it and click OK.
c. Several sections of the closing report are turned off by default. If it is desired to see
these sections you will need to change the value of the registry to YES or NO
depending on your desired result.
i. Daily Closing Hide Employee Time Cards
ii. Daily Closing Hide Gratuity Recap
iii. Daily Closing Show Tender Details
Next Day Transfer

This button will transfer all orders to the next business day. The time for the order will be set to 1
second after the daily start time. This will allow the restaurant to keep orders open but still be able to
close the restaurant for the day. To use this feature, you must have the option called 24 Hour
Operation Mode set in Store Settings > Other.
181
Manager Operations
Bank Liability Report

This feature allows you to review or print the Cashier/Staff Bank liability report. This report will tell
you the cashiers name, when they signed in, when they signed out and what orders they took during
that time frame.
To print out or view a Bank Liability report, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have
started at least one cash drawer or staff bank.
1.
2.
Click on Bank Report. This will prompt you for the Bank Liability Number.
a. The Bank Liability Number can be obtained by using the Register Report explained
later in this section.
Enter the Bank Liability Number. This will bring up the liability report for the cash drawer or
staff bank, whichever was used.
Register Report
This feature gives you a report of the register activities for all of registers on the specified date.
To print out or view a Register Report, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have started at
least one cash drawer or staff bank.
1.
2.
Click Register Report. This will prompt you to enter a date.

Select the date that you want the report for and click Select. This will bring up the report
allowing you to review the report.
One important number on this report is the Bank Liability Number. Use this number to bring up more
detailed information about a Cash Drawer or Staff Bank.
Bank Deposit
This feature lets you count out the bank deposit money and print out the deposit preparation receipt. In
the Money Count screen, enter all of the money that is going to be deposited to the bank. After you
have completed the money count screen, click Finish to print out the Bank Deposit Slip and the Bank
Deposit Money Count receipts.
Manager Operations
182
Gift Certificate List

This feature allows you to review a list of all of the gift certificates that have been issued. To use this
feature, Click on the Gift Certificate List button. You will then be taken to the Gift Certificate List
screen to review the information. If you want to export this list then click the Export button. A
confirmation window will appear and confirm that the report was exported to a text file where you can
use a spreadsheet or word processing program to edit the report. If you want to print the report then
click on the Print button.
Cust. Credit List

This feature allows you to view a list of all of the customer credits. This report can also be exported or
printed out for further use.
Order Pmt List
This feature will allow you to review the payment types and tender amounts of the orders the registers
have collected. This report can also be exported or printed for further use.
Bad Check List
This feature allows you to review a list of all of the bad checks that have been recorded for your
restaurant. When you open the window, if you want to see all of the bad checks weather or not they
have been cleared, put a check in the Show All Checks check box. If you want to edit a bad check,
highlight the bad check and Click the Edit button. If you want to add a new bad check, click the New
button and create the bad check file.
Daily Receipt Summary
This feature allows you to print out all the guest receipts for the specified business day. This will be a
very lengthy printout so make sure you have enough paper in your receipt printer to do this. The guest
receipts will be in a condensed format to save paper and will be on one continuous page. Use this
feature with caution. If you have a busy day and click this button, you will end up printing a whole roll
of receipts.
183
Manager Operations
Z Report
This feature allows you to run a Z Report based on the current up to date sales information or view a
past Z Report based on the Z Reports number. All orders must be closed out and all cashiers including
Staff Bank must be signed out before a Z Report can be run. Some countries require this report and we
have included it to comply with international laws. This report will show the Total Net Sales up to date
and this number cannot be changed for any reason for security purposes, even if orders are deleted out
of the database. There is no exception to this.
You can enable this report by going to Back Office > Help > Technical Support > F10 > Special Z
Report. Change the value from No to Yes.
Re-Open Cashier Out
Reverting or Re-Opening a Cash Drawer

If you have closed a cash drawer and need to make adjustments to it, you can revert the cash drawer
back to an open status. You will only be able to revert cash drawers that are less than 2 days old. If it is
3 days old, you will not be able to revert it for any reason.
To revert a cash drawer, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have closed a cash drawer or
Staff Bank and it is less than 2 days old.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Enter your access code. This will bring up the Operations Center screen.
Click on the Re-Open Cashier button. This will prompt to confirm the revert operation.
Click Yes. This will bring up a screen allowing you to select the bank you wish to re-open.
Click on the bank you wish to re-open. This will prompt to confirm the operation.
a. Make sure you have the correct bank by referring to the Liab. # on the buttons.
Cross reference this by using the Bank Liability option in Revenue Center.
Click Yes to confirm the operation.
Manager Operations
184
Re-Open Deposit
This feature is used to revert a bank deposit. To use this feature, click on the Revert Deposit button.
A confirmation will appear and confirm that you want to revert a deposit. In the next popup window
enter the number of the bank deposit slip that you want to revert. After you enter the deposit slip
number and click the Enter button. You will get a confirmation window that confirms that the
deposit was reverted.
Frequent Diner Section
New Freq. Diner

This feature is used to add a frequent diner account.
To add a new frequent diner, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have the customers
account already created.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on the New Freq. Diner button. This will prompt you for the customer phone number.
Enter the customer phone number. This will bring up the New Freq. Diner screen.
Fill in the customer information. The First Name and Last Name are required.
Click Finish.
This will create both a customer record and a frequent diner account for that customer.
Track Order
This feature is used to track orders for the frequent diner feature.
To track an order for the frequent diner program, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the Track Order button. This will prompt you for the customer phone number.
Enter the customer phone number. This will prompt you for the order number of the order you
wish to track.
Enter the order number. This will bring up a confirmation window either saying that that order
cannot be tracked or that that order has been successfully tracked.
a. If the order cannot be tracked, the order has not met the specified minimum
requirements needed to qualify this order.
185
Manager Operations
Redemption
This feature is used to manually control the redemption of the frequent diner points that the customer
may have earned.
To manually redeem credits for frequent diner orders, follow the steps below. These steps assume there
are orders that have been tracked for use with the frequent diner system.
1.
2.
Click the Redemption button. This will prompt for the customer phone number.
Enter the customer phone number. This will prompt for the credit amount to be given for this
customer's orders.
Note: If you have automatic redemption or frequent diner-tracking points turned on, this procedure will
be automatically done.
Freq. Diner Acct. List
This feature lets you view a list of all the frequent diner accounts. The report shows all of the frequent
diner accounts with the total tracked orders and total tracked order amounts for each account.
In House Charge Section
This section is for reviewing and maintaining all of your In House Charge Accounts. You can access
this section by Clicking on Operations > In House Charge. There are four subsections in this section.
Below are descriptions of the subsections and how to use them.
Maintain In House Accounts
This feature will allow you to add or update current In House Charge accounts. To use this feature,
click the Maintain In House Accounts button. You will be taken to the Maintain In House Charge
Account screen where you can pick the customer from the list on the left side of the window and review
their information. If you want to add a new account, click the New button and enter the customers
information. Click the Save button to save the changes. Once you are finished with the window,
click Done.
Manager Operations
186
Create In House Statement

This feature allows you to issue statements to the customer for accounts that are due.
To create statements for your In House Accounts, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have
created at least one in house account for a customer and there are charges on that account.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on Create In House Statement. This will bring up a list of In House Account.
Select the accounts you wish to generate statements for.
Click Done. This will bring up the statements.
There are several options on this screen.
a. Previous will take you to the previous statement.
b. Next will take you to the next statement.
c. Clear Current will remove this from the list of statements you are currently looking at.
d. Print Current will print the statement currently being viewed.
e. Print All will print all the statements you have in the print list.
These statements have been arranged so they will fit in a normal business envelope with the plastic
window.
In House Account List
This feature allows you to review a list of all of the In House Accounts that your restaurant has. To use
this feature, click the In House Account List button to bring up the report. You can review it on screen
or you can use the Print or Export options previously described.
Customer Files
This feature allows you to review all of the customer files for your restaurant. To use this feature, click
the Customer Files button to bring up the Maintain Customer Records screen. Once you are in this
window you can review the customers file by clicking the phone number in the list on the left side of
the screen. If you want to add a new customer file to the list, click the New button and enter the
customers information. Click the Save button to save the changes.
Inventory Activities Section
This section allows you to review inventory items, purchase order information, and other reports. To
access this section, click the Inventory Activities button in Operations. There are several buttons in
this section and below is a description and explanation of what each of these buttons does.
187
Manager Operations
Shopping List
If you are using the automatic inventory depletion and an inventory item falls below the Pack Size
Reorder Point specified in the Inventory Items screen, the item will be placed on the Shopping List.
This list helps the manager see what items need to be ordered to bring the inventory back up to
acceptable levels.
New PO (Purchase Order)
This feature allows you to create a new purchase order when ordering items from vendors. For more
information on using this feature refer to New Purchase Order section of this manual. This feature can
also be accessed in the back office under Activities > Inventory Activities.
Review PO
This feature allows you to review existing purchase orders.
To review an existing Purchase Order, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already
created a purchase order.
1.
2.
3.
Click the Review PO button. This will bring up the Purchase Order Selection screen.
In this window you can select the purchase order that you want to review by clicking on the
name of the purchase order and clicking Review. This will bring up the purchase order.
a. If you want to delete the purchase order than select the name of the purchase order
that you want to delete and click Delete.
Once in the purchase order screen, you can edit this like you normally would.
Manager Operations
188
Receive Items
This feature allows you to receive inventory items that you will get from your vendors. This feature
will record your inventory items that you're receiving from your vendor and calculate your inventory
items quantity on hand along with the cost per quantity.
To use the Receive Items feature, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on the Receive Items button. This will bring up the Receive Inventory Items screen.
Select the date range with the Earliest PO Date and Received Date fields.
Select the purchase order that you want to receive in the drop down list at the top of the screen.
Review the items for this purchase order. If all information is correct, you can click Finish.
a. If the information for any item is incorrect or still needs to be filled in, click Edit
after you highlight the item.
b. If you need to add an item that is not on this list for this purchase order, click Add.
c. If you need to remove an item from this purchase order, highlight the item and click
Remove.
Once the list is complete and correct, click Finish.
Phy. Count Sheet

This feature is used to do physical inventory counts on paper. To use this feature, click the Phy.
Count Sheet button to bring up the Physical Inventory Worksheet. You can view the sheet onscreen,
export, or print it out.
Phy. Inv. Count
This feature is used to record the physical inventory that is actually on hand.
To record your physical inventory, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have inventory
already entered in the system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on the Phy. Inv. Count button. This will bring up the Physical Inventory Count
screen.
Highlight the inventory item that you will enter a new quantity for.
Enter the new quantity that is on hand in the New Qty field.
a. This is the total qty you have on hand, not how much you are adding.
Click the Record button once you are done entering the numbers in.
a. Once you click Record, you will leave this screen.
189
Manager Operations
If you have already scanned all of your inventory items on a scanning device, export that info into a text
file on your computer. You can then click the Inv. Download button and choose that text file with all
the scanned inventory items. Click the Download button to import the file to the software and show
the actual physical inventory.
Inv. Prep. Forecast
This feature gives you a report for seeing how many inventory units the kitchen should prepare for.
This information is based on past inventory usage history for up to six weeks for the weekday. Please
note that proper menu recipes and inventory depletion have to be defined and enabled for this feature to
work. To use this feature, click on the Inv. Prep. Forecast button to bring up the report. You can
print out or export this report using the appropriate buttons.
Inventory Items
This feature lets you maintain the inventory items. To use this feature, click on the Inventory Items
button to bring up the Inventory Item screen. You can either review the items or you can add new items
by clicking the New button. Enter the information for the new inventory item and click Save. For
more information on setting up an inventory item refer to the inventory setup section
Menu Recipe
This feature lets you add a menu recipe to a menu item. You must use this feature if you are going to
be using Inventory Depletion. To use this feature, Click on the Menu Recipe button to bring up the
Menu Recipe Editor screen. For more information on creating menu recipes refer to the inventory setup
section.
Other Tools Section
This section allows you to use several options that are not defined in other parts of the software and also
provides some shortcuts to other features in the back office. To use this section click Operations >
Other Tools.
Caller ID Log
This feature lets you review the entire Caller ID Logs as long as you have your Caller ID configured
and working. To use this feature, Click on the Caller ID Log button to bring up the Caller ID Log
screen. You can review the logs in this screen if you highlight the call that you want and click the
Details button.
Manager Operations
190
Caller ID Switch
This feature is used to turn on your Caller ID. If you have the Caller ID feature configured in your
system, you should not have to worry about this button.
Customer Incidents
This feature lets you record bad calls that your restaurant may get. To record a bad call, click on the
Customer Incidents button to enter the phone number that the call came from. The New Customer
Incident screen will appear allowing you to enter the number of the order in the ORDER # field, if any
food was lost due to the call, and any details of the bad call.
This information will show up in the Customer Information screen while taking Take Out or Delivery
orders. The Customer Incidents button will be flashing warning the user that this customer has
caused issues before. Click on this button to see more details of the incidents.
Assign Table
This feature allows a manager to assign tables without having to go into the Back Office. If the
manager has the security level to run a closing report, they will have access to this feature.
To Training Mode
This feature is used to turn the training mode on and off. To use this feature, click the To Training
Mode button to bring up the confirmation screen. After you click Yes, you will then get a confirmation
window telling you that you are now in training mode. To switch back to live mode, click the To Live
Mode button. This button is where the To Training Mode button used to be. You will get a
confirmation window confirming that you want to revert to live mode. Click the Yes button to bring up
another confirmation window confirming that you are now running in live mode.
Note: If you notice that your training database does not have current information in it, you will need to
go to the directory where Aldelo for Restaurants was installed and delete the Training.mdb file. This
will cause the software to create another Training database using the current information in you regular
database.
Edit Work Schedule
This feature is used to change the schedules of an employee. To use this feature, click the Edit Work
Schedule button to bring up the Employee Schedules screen. Here you will select the employee that
you want to change their schedule. For more information on how to change or create an employees
schedule refer to the Employee Setup section of the manual.
191
Manager Operations
Add Cash To Bank

This feature allows you to add money to the start amount of either a Staff Bank or a Cashier. To use
this feature, Click on the Add To Bank button and enter in the Bank Liability Number. You will be
prompted to enter the amount that you want to add to the bank start amount. Enter the amount and click
Enter.
Calculator
This feature is a shortcut to the Windows Calculator. To use this feature, Click on the Calculator button
and the calculator will appear.
Emp. Still Working
This feature lets you review a list of all the employees that are still working. To use this feature, click
on the Emp. Still Working button to review the employees that are still working and the time that they
clocked in.
Driver Summary
This feature gives you a report of the drivers net sales, delivery compensation, and the number of
deliveries that were taken. To use this feature, click on the Driver Summary button to review the report,
print the report or export the report to a text file.
Open Order Report
This feature gives you a list of all the open orders and who the server for the order is. To use this
feature, click on the Open Order Report button to bring up the Open Order Report screen. Here you
can review all of the open order information or you can print the report.
Menu Item Sales By Category
This feature allows you to choose a category and view menu items sales based on the category you have
chosen. You can also choose to view all categories to see a complete list of items in your restaurant.
This report will show quantity and sales information for the menu items. This report can also be printed
or exported.
Manager Operations
192
Sales By Category Report

This feature will give you a report of sales listed by category. This is a shortcut to the Sales By
Category Report in the Back Office.
Sales By Menu Item Report
This feature will give you a report of sales listed by menu item. This is a shortcut to the Sales By Menu
Item Report in the Back Office.
Server Gratuity Report
This feature will give you report of the tips each server has made for the specified date. This is a
shortcut to the Server Gratuity Report in the Back Office.
193
Maintenance Activities
Chapter 22
194
General Activities
This will describe the different manager functions that can be done in the back office of Aldelo For
Restaurants. These items are in the menu bar under Activities.
Pay Employees
Aldelo For Restaurants has a simple form of payroll and can assist in generation all the information you
will need to actually pay your employees. This will not calculate taxes or perform advanced
deductions. It is simply a way to generate a statement for the hours worked, overtime hours, and how
much should be paid.
To generate payroll, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have employees with time card
information.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click the Pay Employees button in the Back Office. This will bring up the Pay Employees
screen.
a. You can also get to this screen from the Activities section under General Activities.
Select the employees you want to prepare payroll for.
a. Use the single arrow for one employee, the double arrow for all employees.
Fill in the Pay Period End Date field with the last day of this pay period. Use the format
MM/DD/YYYY.
If there is any additional pay you need to give an employee, select the employee on the right
and click Additional. This will prompt for the amount to give this employee in addition to
their pay.
Click Preview. Review the report to check for mistakes and print it out.
Once everything is correct, click Pay.
If you generate a payroll by mistake, you can undo the previous payroll to try again. This will only
undo one payroll and cannot roll back a payroll done earlier than the current payroll.
New Local Email
As a way to communicate to other employees, Aldelo For Restaurants has an internal email system.
This system does not communicate with the internet but will store messages internally between
employees.
To send an email to an employee, follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on New Local Email. This will bring up the New Local Email Message screen.
Use the drop down list under To Employee(s) to filter the job type of the employees you
wish to email.
Select the employees you wish to email.
Select the employee from the drop down list of who the email is from.
Type a message in the Message field.
195
a.
6.
You can use the Keyboard button to type this in if a physical keyboard is not
present.
Click Send.
Review Local Email

As a manager, you will want to keep track of your employees communications between each other to
make sure the system is not being abused.
To review emails sent by employees, follow the steps below. These steps assume emails have been
created.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on Review Local Emails. This will be under Activities > General Activities in the
Back Office. This will bring up the Local Email Maintenance screen.
Select the employee you wish to review.
Click Read Email. This will bring up the Local Email Viewer screen.
Select the email message in the Email Messages section. The email will display on the right.
Video Surveillance Control Center

This feature is only available if you have a web cam installed and have Enable Video Surveillance
Captures check box under the General tab in Station Settings. To use the Video Surveillance Control
Center go to the Back Office under Activities > General Activities.
Once you are inside the Video Surveillance Control Center, there will be three buttons; Snapshot,
Preferences, and Close.
Snapshot: Takes a snapshot of what the camera is currently focused on.
Preferences: The check boxes in Preferences allow you to choose when you do not want the camera to
take a snapshot. For example, if you did not want the system to take a snapshot of a No Sale action,
you would put a check in the box that says Disable No Sale Watch. Under Preferences there are four
other buttons titled Compression, Display, Format, and Source. Use these to adjust your settings for the
camera to get the best picture quality. Under the Format option we recommend using 320 x 240 for the
Resolution and RGB 555 (16bit) for the Pixel Depth (bits) and Compression. The last two options for
using the Control Center are the two delete functions. With one you can specify how many days you
want to pass before old snapshots are deleted and the other will delete all snapshots currently in the
folder.
196
Video Surveillance Review Browser

This feature is used to review the pictures the system captured. The Video Surveillance Review
Browser feature can be found in the Back Office under Activities > General Activities.
To use this feature, you will want to select the type of pictures that you want to review from the Look In
drop down list. Select the picture from the list at the bottom of the window and the picture will be
displayed.
Create Menu Item Labels
If you have menu items that you want to generate stickers for, you can use the menu item label
generator to print them out. This will search for all items with barcodes and print a label to stick on the
actual item.
To print barcode labels for menu items, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have an Aldelo
certified label printer and will be using 1 x 3 labels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click on Create Menu Item Labels. This will bring up the Menu Item Label Generator.
Choose either All Menu Items with Barcode or Select Menu Items with Barcode.
If you choose Select Menu Items with Barcode, you can filter by Menu Category or by
Menu Group.
Click Search.
Select the items you wish to print labels for.
Enter the number of copies you wish to print.
Click Print.
197
Maintain Pay Outs

Pay Out Date/Time: This field allows you to view the date and time the Pay Out was issued.
Cashier Name: This field allows you to view who the cashier was who issued the Pay Out.
Cash Tray#: This field allows you to view what cash tray the Pay Out was issued out of.
Authorized By: This field allows you to view who authorize the Pay Out.
Pay Out To: This field allows you to view whom the Pay Out was given.
Pay Out Amount: This field allows you to view how much the Pay Out was.
Pay Out Details: This allows you to view what details were entered when the Pay Out was issued.
Wage Advance For: This field allows you to view who received a Wage Advance.
Pay Out Voided: This option allows you to void a Pay Out if it was enter by mistake.
Void Reason: This field allows you to enter a reason why the Pay Out was voided.
Maintain Manager Cash Outs
Cash Out #: This field allows you to view the number the software assigned to the cash out record.
Cash Out Date/Time: This field allows you to view the date and time the manager performed the cash
out.
Cash Out By: This field allows you to view who performed the cash out.
Cash Out Amount: This field allows you to view the cash out amount.
Station Number: This field allows you to view which station performed the manager cash out.
Cashier Name: This field allows you to view which employee was signed in when the manager cash
out was performed.
Cash Tray #: This field allows you to view which cash tray the manager cash out was used when it
was performed.
Bank Liability Report #: This field allows you to view which Bank Liability report number was used
to perform the manager cash out.
198
Cash Out Voided: This option allows you to void the managers cash out.
Void Reason: This field allows you to enter a reason for voiding the manager cash out.
Global Menu Item Price Change

If you need to do batch updates on your menu item prices, you will want to use the global menu item
price change feature. This screen will allow you to adjust menu item prices very quickly in many
different ways.
To change prices on menu items using the Global Menu Item Price Change screen, follow the steps
below. These steps assume you have created a couple of menu items.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Global Menu Item Price Change. This will bring up the Global Menu Item Price
Change screen.
Select the group in which you want to make changes. You can also leave this on All Menu
Groups.
Select the items you want to change prices on.
Select the change option.
a. Markup By Percent
b. Markup By Amount
c. Markdown By Percent
d. Markdown By Amount
e. Amount
i. Use the Amount field to specify the amount of the new price.
Click Update
a. The results will display in the Price Change Results section.
Note: Be careful with this feature. Changes are permanent and cannot be reversed.
199
Export Menu Item Sales

This will export sales information about menu items to a CSV text file. Here is a sample of the text file.
The fields are Menu Item ID, Qty ordered, total sales, 1, Menu Item Name, Menu Group Name, Menu
Item Price
250, 1.000, 3.95, 1, Onion Rings, Appetizers, 3.95
251, 3.000, 14.85, 1, Nachos, Appetizers, 4.95
252, 6.000, 35.70, 1, Potato Skins, Appetizers, 5.95
253, 7.000, 55.65, 1, Shrimp Cocktail, Appetizers, 7.95
254, 9.000, 35.55, 1, Fried Zuchini, Appetizers, 3.95
255, 23.000, 113.85, 1, Fried Mozzarella, Appetizers, 4.95
256, 6.000, 29.70, 1, Quesadilla, Appetizers, 4.95
257, 8.000, 55.60, 1, Chicken Tenders, Appetizers, 6.95
258, 7.000, 55.65, 1, Lemon Pep. Shrimp, Appetizers, 7.95
259, 4.000, 31.80, 1, Cajun Shrimp, Appetizers, 7.95
260, 0.750, 0.92, 1, Stuft Jalapeno, Appetizers, 1.23
200
Customer Activities
Maintain Customer Records

Phone Number: This field allows you to enter a phone number for this customer.
Customer Name: This field allows you to enter a customer name for this account.
Delivery Address: This field allows you to enter an address for this customer which will be used when
taking a delivery or take out order.
Cross Street: This field allows you to enter a cross street name for the delivery address.
Postal Code: This field allows you to enter a postal code for the delivery address.
Delivery Charge: This field allows you to enter a delivery charge for this customer.
Delivery Compensation: This field allows you to enter a delivery compensation for this customer.
Delivery Remarks: This field allows you to enter a delivery remark for this customer.
VIP: This drop down allows you to select the VIP level for this customer. You can set the different
VIP level discounts in the Registry Settings of the software.
Customer Notes: This field allows you to enter any customer notes that will be associated with this
customer.
MSR Card: This field allows an MSR Card to be assigned to this customer. This is used when doing a
search for a customer.
Account Code: This field allows you to enter an account code for this customer. This is used when
doing a search for a customer.
201
Create Customer Address Labels

If you have customers that you want to generate stickers for, you can use the customer address label
generator to print them out. This will search for all customers and print a label to stick on customer
mailings.
To print address labels for customers, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have an Aldelo
certified label printer and will be using 1 x 3 labels.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Click on Create Customer Address Labels. This will bring up the Customer Address Label
Generator.
Choose either All Customers with Mailing Address or Select Customer with Mailing
Address.
If you choose Select Customer with Mailing Address, you can filter by:
a. Postal Code
b. Area Code
c. Anniversary Month
d. Highest Spending Customers
e. Lowest Spending Customers.
Click Search.
Select the customers you wish to print labels for.
Click Print.
Maintain In House Charge Accounts

Customer Phone Number: This field allows you to enter a phone number for this account.
First Name: This field allows you to enter a first name for this account.
Last Name: This field allows you to enter a last name for this account.
Mailing Address: This field allows you to enter the mailing address for this customers account.
Mailing Postal Code: This field allows you to enter the postal code for the mailing address.
Tax Account Number: This field allows you to enter a social security number or the equivalent for
this account.
Drivers License Number: This field allows you to enter a Drivers License Number for this account.
Drivers License Expires: This field allows you to enter an expiration date for the drivers license.
Credit Limit: This field allows you to enter an amount that that customer has for the account. This
works the same way as a credit card.
202
Credit Account Expires: This allows you to enter a date the account will expire.
MSR Card: This field allows you to assign an MSR Card to this account. This will give the customer
the feel of using a credit card given by your restaurant.
Credit Account Status: This drop down menu allows you to set the status of the account. This can be
Active, Past Due, or Closed.
Credit Account Notes: This field allows you to enter any notes about this account.
Create In House Charge Statements

This feature allows you to issue statements to the customer for accounts that are due.
To create statements for your In House Accounts, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have
created at least one in house account for a customer and there are charges on that account.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on Create In House Charge Statement. This will bring up a list of In House Account.
Select the accounts you wish to generate statements for.
Click Done. This will bring up the statements.
There are several options on this screen.
a. Previous will take you to the previous statement.
b. Next will take you to the next statement.
c. Clear Current will remove this from the list of statements you are currently looking at.
d. Print Current will print the statement currently being viewed.
e. Print All will print all the statements you have in the print list.
These statements have been arranged so they will fit in a normal business envelope with the plastic
window.
203
Maintain Frequent Diner Accounts

Customer Phone Number: This field allows you to enter a phone number for this account.
First Name: This field allows you to enter a first name for this account.
Last name: This field allows you to enter a last name for this account.
Mailing Address: This field allows you to enter a mailing address for this account.
Mailing Postal Code: This field allows you to enter a postal code for the mailing address.
MSR Card: This field allows you to use MSR Cards for this Frequent Diner Account.
Email: This field allows you to enter an email address for this customer.
Maintain Frequent Diner Tracking
If you want to see how a particular customer is doing with their frequent diner account, you will want to
use this to see what orders the customer has outstanding that have not been redeemed.
To see customers orders that have not been redeemed in the frequent diner program, follow the steps
below.
1.
2.
3.
Click on Maintain Frequent Diner Tracking. This will prompt for the customer phone
number.
Enter the customer phone number. This will bring up the Maintain Unredeemed Frequent
Diner Tracking Points screen.
You can view the information on this page or click Remove to remove selected orders from
the list.
204
Maintain Customer Credits

Credit Number: This field allows you to view the number assigned to the credit by the software.
Issue Date/Time: This field allows you to view the date and time the credit was issued.
Customer Phone Number: This field allows you to view the customers phone number that received
the credit.
Issued By Employee: This field allows you to view the employee that issued the credit.
Credit Type: This field allows you to view the type of credit that was issued to the customer.
Credit Amount: This field allows you to view the amount of the credit that was issued.
Credit Expires: This field allows you to view the expiration date of the credit if there is one.
Credit Reason: This field allows you to view the reason that was given for why the credit was given.
Credit Limitations: This field allows you to view what limitations were placed on the credit.
Credit Status: This drop down allows you to edit the status of the credit. The three choices are
Active, All Redeemed, Voided.
Void Reason: This field allows you to enter a reason why the credit was voided.
205
Maintain Gift Certificates

Gift Certificate Number: This field allows you view the Gift Certificate Number the software
assigned. This number is the number you will use to redeem the Gift Certificate.
Issued Date/Time: This field allows you view the date and time the Gift Certificate was issued.
Account Number: This field allows you to view the number you assigned to the Gift Certificate. This
is the number used to redeem the Gift Certificate if you are not using MSR cards.
Authorized By: This field allows you to view who authorized the Gift Certificate.
Issued To: This field allows you to view who the Gift Certificate was issued to.
Presented By: This field allows you to enter the name of the person that is presenting the Gift
Certificate. This is used for entering in the name of the person who is usually giving it as a gift.
Issued Amount: This field allows you to view the dollar value that was assigned to the Gift
Certificate.
206
Expiration Date: This field allows you to view the expiration date of the Gift Certificate if there is
one.
Status: This drop down list allows you to set if the Gift Certificate is Active, All Redeemed, or
Voided.
Void Reason: This field allows you to enter a reason for voiding the Gift Certificate.
New Bad Check
If a customer writes a bad check, you will want to make a record of that bad check. This will prevent
accepting checks from this customer in the future if desired. Simply fill in all information for the bad
check and click Finish.
Follow Up Bad Check
This screen allows you to select a check you would like to follow up on or edit. Once you have selected
the check you can edit the information concerning the check in the same screen as the Record New Bad
Check screen. You can also record a new bad check from this screen.
207
Inventory Activities
New Purchase Order
Purchase Order #: This is the number assigned to this purchase order. If it is a new purchase order, it
will say new until the purchase order has been saved.
Account Number: This is the account number for this supplier. This will show in the list when you
are reviewing your purchase orders.
Vendor Name: This field allows you to enter the name of the vendor that these item(s) are coming
from.
Purchase Order Date: This field allows you to enter the date that the items were ordered.
Barcode Scan: This field allows you to enter the barcode of an item. You should scan the UPC
barcode that is on the item.
Inventory Item Name: This field allows you to enter the name of the inventory item. This field will
attempt to guess what item you are trying to enter while you type.
Quantity Ordered: This field allows you to enter the quantity that was ordered.
Price Per Quantity: This field allows you to enter the price per quantity of the ordered items.
After you have entered all of the information, you will need to click the Add button to add the items
to the list. If you want to print the purchase order, click the Print button.
Review Purchase Order
This feature allows you to review existing purchase orders.
To review an existing Purchase Order, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already
1.
2.
3.
Click Review Purchase Order. This will bring up the Purchase Order Selection screen.
In this window you can select the purchase order that you want to review by clicking on the
name of the purchase order and clicking Review. This will bring up the purchase order.
a. If you want to delete the purchase order than select the name of the purchase order
that you want to delete and click Delete.
Once in the purchase order screen, you can edit this like you normally would.
208
Create PO From Shopping List

If you have a large shopping list, you will want to use this feature to quickly create purchase orders for
the vendors.
To create purchase orders for all vendors using the shopping list, follow the steps below.
1. Click on Create PO From Shopping List. This will bring up the shopping list.
Create Inventory Item Labels
If you have inventory items that you want to generate stickers for, you can use the inventory item label
generator to print them out. This will search for all items with barcodes and print a label to stick on the
actual item.
To print barcode labels for inventory items, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have an
Aldelo certified label printer and will be using 1 x 3 labels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click on Create Inventory Item Labels. This will bring up the Inventory Item Label
Generator.
Choose either All Inventory Items with Barcode or Select Inventory Items with Barcode.
If you choose Select Inventory Items with Barcode, you can filter by Inventory Vendor or by
Inventory Group.
Click Search.
Select the items you wish to print labels for.
Click Print.
209
Receive Inventory Items

This feature allows you to receive inventory items that you will get from your vendors. This feature
will record your inventory items that you're receiving from your vendor and calculate your inventory
items quantity on hand along with the cost per quantity.
To use the Receive Items feature, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on the Receive Items button. This will bring up the Receive Inventory Items screen.
Select the date range with the Earliest PO Date and Received Date fields.
Select the purchase order that you want to receive in the drop down list at the top of the screen.
Review the items for this purchase order. If all information is correct, you can click Finish.
a. If the information for any item is incorrect or still needs to be filled in, click Edit
after you highlight the item.
b. If you need to add an item that is not on this list for this purchase order, click Add.
c. If you need to remove an item from this purchase order, highlight the item and click
Remove.
Once the list is complete and correct, click Finish.
Physical Inventory Count

This feature is used to record the physical inventory that is actually on hand.
To record your physical inventory, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have inventory
already entered in the system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on Physical Inventory Count. This will bring up the Physical Inventory Count screen.
Highlight the inventory item that you will enter a new quantity for.
Enter the new quantity that is on hand in the New Qty field.
a. This is the total qty you have on hand, not how much you are adding.
Click the Record button once you are done entering the numbers in.
b. Once you click Record, you will leave this screen.
If you have already scanned all of your inventory items on a scanning device, export that info into a text
file on your computer. You can then click the Inv. Download button and choose that text file with all
the scanned inventory items. Click the Download button to import the file to the software and show
the actual physical inventory.
210
Monitor Client Connections
This feature allows you to view all of the clients that are connected to the network. It also allows you to
shut down any clients that are not connected but the software is not allowing you to compact or backup
the database. This feature can be accessed from the Back Office under the Activities > Maintenance
Activities. Once you are in the Aldelo for Restaurants Client Connection Monitor, the maximum
number of clients allowed is shown at the bottom of the window in green. Just below the maximum
number is the number of clients that are currently logged on to the system. If the window shows a
client is logged on and Aldelo for Restaurants is not running on the client computer, put a check in the
check box for the client that is not connected and Click the Shut Down Client button. This will remove
that client from the client connections.
If you ever get a message that says something like, You have exceeded your max number of licenses
or something along those lines then you will need to shut down the client that the system thinks is
connected but in reality it is not connected. To do this follow the steps mentioned above.
Remove All Access Denied Logs
This feature allows you to delete all of the access denied logs. This feature can be found in the Back
Office under Activities > Maintenance Activities. This will delete all Access Denied recordings, and
may shrink down the database size. After cleaning up the Access Denied Logs, be sure to compact the
database afterwards to make it more efficient.
Remove All Caller ID Logs
This feature lets you delete all of the Caller ID logs. This feature can be found in the Back Office under
Activities > Maintenance Activities. This will delete all Caller ID recordings, and will reduce the
database size. After cleaning up the Caller ID logs, be sure to compact the database to make it more
efficient.
Remove All Customer Names From Orders
This feature allows you to remove all of the names from specified customers orders. This feature can
be found in the Back Office under Activities > Maintenance Activities. After you have selected this
choice then a popup window will appear and prompt you to enter the customers phone number. Enter
the phone number of the customer who you want to delete all names that are attached to the orders.
After you enter the phone number you will get a confirmation window saying how many names have
been deleted.
211
Remove All Redeemed Gift Certificate MSR Card Information

This feature allows you to remove all of the swipe card information for gift certificates that have
already been redeemed. You can find this feature in the Back Office under Activities > Maintenance
Activities. After you have selected this choice, you will get a confirmation screen asking if you want to
remove all scan codes from redeemed gift certificates. Next you will get another confirmation window
confirming that all of the scan code information was deleted. MSR Card information that is already
redeemed will automatically deleted from the system every time the software is restarted.
Remove Prior Manager Cash Outs
This feature allows you to remove all the prior manager cash out information. You can find this feature
in the Back Office under Activities > Maintenance Activities. You will be prompted to enter a date
using the month, day, and year buttons. Anything before this date will be removed from the system.
Remove Prior Reservations
This feature allows you to remove all the prior reservation information. You can find this feature in the
Back Office under Activities > Maintenance Activities. You will be prompted to enter a date using the
month, day, and year buttons. Anything before this date will be removed from the system.
Delete Master Data
This feature allows you to delete any entries in your database that have never been used and were errors
when creating the database. Select the category on the left to display the items on the right. Select the
items you want to delete. If the item is in use by the system it will display that you cannot delete this
record. Compact the database immediately after using this feature.
Note: This feature is highly useful when you are done creating your database before your restaurant
opens to clean out any entries that may not need to be there.
You will only be able to delete items that do not have sales associated with them. If you have ever used
the item in the list to perform a sale, attached the item to another item in the database or have any links
whatsoever, then it will be in the database forever. The only other option is to dump all your sales to
free up the items and unlink them so they can be deleted. Make sure the object does not have, for
instance, a forced modifier connected to it.
Refresh Cumulative Grand Total
This option will recalculate the total sales when using the Show Non Resettable Grand Total feature
in Store Settings > Other.
Third Party Add Ins
New
When you click this, you will open a file with the following information.
Instructions:
1) To create a Menu Separator, enter DASH PIPE DASH.
2) To enter Menu Command, enter DESCRIPTION,
then PIPE, then the EXECUTABLE PATH.
===> Enter Menu Commands Starting The Following Line <===
New|CurrentPath
-|Calculator|C:\WINDOWS\System32\calc.exe
Notepad|C:\WINDOWS\System32\notepad.exe
This will allow you to create more links to other programs. This will not integrate the programs but
will allow you to open the program from within Aldelo For Restaurants.
Calculator
This will open up Windows Calculator.
Notepad
This will open up Windows Notepad.
212
213
Chapter 23
Database Maintenance
214
Database & Support Files

Below is a list of some of the files and explanations of what they are and do.
adResSettings.dat
This file contains the Store Settings for your database and anytime you perform a backup, this file will
be copied along with the database. Also anytime an error occurs in your software, this file will help us
speed up the time it takes to troubleshoot the issue in the system. If you are encountering an error, call
us and arrange to send this file by email.
adResISV.dat
This file contains the external software link, for example the link to the Windows Calculator is inside
this file. You can put your own links to other types of software that you have on your computer into
this file. If you do this then the link that you made will be in the Back Office under the Activities drop
down list. Select Third Party Add-Ins to view your choices. Please note that if you enter a link to a
different program, the program that you are linking to must be installed on the computer. The
instructions on how to edit this file are in the file when you open it with notepad. The only item not
mentioned in the instruction is the & symbol. This is used to mark a letter as the hotkey for that word.
You will use the & symbol before the letter you want to be the hotkey. Also you might need to change
the path name for the items already in the file to match your computers path for those programs.
adResHostess.dat
This file contains all the settings for the Hostess functions of the software.
adRes.lang
This file contains the information used to display the text in the software. If the software cannot
connect to this file, Aldelo For Restaurants will display but the buttons will not have any text.
Database Engine Used

The database engine that Aldelo for Restaurants uses is Microsoft Jet 4.
Database Recommended Limits

The recommended database limits are; the database file cannot be any larger than 2 gigabytes. There
are no limits on the number of clients that can connect to the database but performance will suffer
greatly if there are a large number of clients connected to a database that is located on a slow machine.
215
Compact Database
Periodically, such as every two weeks or month, you may want to perform the Compact Database
feature in the Back Office. Compacting the database will shrink the database and re-claim its unused
spaces over time. This will in turn make the database smaller, faster, and run more efficient. To
compact the database go to the computer that has the database located locally on the computer, be sure
to close down all other client stations that are connected to this database computer. Then go to the Back
Office, and Click the Compact Database button to start the compact process. Once the compaction is
finished, you will be notified that the compact process has been successfully completed.
Jet Compact Utility

If you need to use the Jet Compact Utility, you can run it from inside Aldelo for Restaurants. Go to
Back Office > Help > Technical Support and press F12 on the keyboard. Enter in the password of
05338942. The software will ask you if all stations are shut down allowing you to check and make sure
this is the case. Once all stations are shut down, follow the steps to perform the operation. This
function will also create a backup of the database before the compact is performed so if anything goes
wrong all is not lost.
Backup Database
Backing up the database allows you to make backup copies of your database in the case that your real
database becomes corrupted or unusable. You can only backup the database at the computer that has
the database locally stored on the computer. You cannot backup the database to a floppy drive. It has
to be a Zip drive, a CD recorder drive, a tape drive, or the hard drive itself. The reason is the database
is too large for a floppy. To back up the database go to the Back Office and click on the Backup
Database button. Select the folder where the database will be stored. We have provided a backup
folder for your use in the Aldelo for Restaurants folder during setup. After you have selected the folder
for the backup, click the Backup button. After the backup is complete then you will get a confirmation
window confirming that the back up has been completed. The database, the adResSettings.dat and the
asResHostess.dat file will be backed up. Keep these files safe and always keep a second location for
the backup just in case your primary backup is damaged.
You can also use the Windows built in backup software to schedule automated backup times so that
you can snapshot your database at certain time intervals, or simply automate the once a day back up all
together. This can also be done through Aldelo for Restaurants in Station Settings > General. The only
thing to keep in mind is the other stations must not be running Aldelo for Restaurants when a backup is
performed.
Import / Export
Chapter 24
Import/Export
216
217
Import / Export
Exporting Data
This feature allows you to export data to transfer to another blank database or into an existing database.
To export the data, select the data you would like to export and click Export. If you want to export the
entire database, select Export Entire Database.
This will create a text file containing all the data you have chosen to export. This data is in a
proprietary format and cannot be edited. The exported file will be saved in the Export folder contained
in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Aldelo Systems\Aldelo Data\Aldelo For
Restaurants\Export directory.
Import Data
This feature allows you to import data that was exported from another Aldelo for Restaurants database.
If you try and import into a database that has existing data, it will hide the information that could not be
imported in. Simply create a new item and pick the menu items that have been hidden to bring them
back. Follow the steps below to use the import feature.
1.
2.
Click Import.
Locate the export file and click "Open".
Import New Resource Database

This feature allows you to import a new language database created in the Aldelo Localization Utility.
The name of the language database should be adRes.imp. This file contains all the strings for the
software allowing you to change them and customize your software. Refer to the Aldelo Localization
manual for more information on how to create new language databases.
Exporting Reports
Aldelo for Restaurants allows you to export all of the built-in reports. Once you are inside the report,
Click the Export button. You will then get a confirmation window confirming that the report has
been saved to an .xls file in the programs directory under the Export folder. You can use Microsoft
Excel to view the exported file.
Reports
Chapter 25
Reports
218
219
Reports
Sales Summary Report

This report shows total sales for the specified date range. This will give an overall view of how the
restaurant did for the day.
Reports
Guest Count Report

This report shows the total number of guests that have been served for the specified date range. All
guests are sorted by Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner and Total Guests.
220
221
Reports
Sales By Category Report

This report shows the total sales in the report date range, grouped by the menu categories that you may
have defined. This report is useful for reviewing the sales by different categories in the restaurant, such
as Meals, Liquors, etc, giving you an over all look at the sales level.
Reports
Sales By Hour (Summary) Report

This report shows the total sales in the report date range, grouped by the hour blocks in a summary
format. This report is useful for finding out, which is the busier hour block, so that you can prepare
your staff better.
222
223
Reports
Sales By Hour Details Report

This report shows the total sales in the report date range, grouped by the hour blocks in a detailed
format. This reports usefulness is the same as the Total Sales By Hour Summary Report, except you
will be able to find out the items that were sold within each hour block.
Reports
224
Sales By Menu Item Report

This report shows the total sales in the report date range, grouped by menu items. This report is useful
to find out the hottest selling items, slowest selling items, or simply a good overview of items sold
through the report period.
225
Reports
Sales By Order Type Report

This report shows the total sales in the report date range, grouped by order types, also called Revenue
Centers. The usefulness of this report is that it will show you how much youre doing sales for each of
the order types that you offer.
Reports
226
Sales By Server Report

This report shows the total sales in the report date range grouped by servers. You can use this report to
see how much each server is doing in sales.
227
Reports
Sales By Station Report

This report shows the total sales in the report date range grouped by computer stations. You can use
this report to see the load of computer stations usage in a report period. You can also use this
information to better utilize POS station usage, and the possibility of adding additional POS stations.
Reports
228
Daily Sales Analysis Report

This report shows the total sales in the report date range grouped by days. This report gives you an over
all picture of your sales on the reported days.
229
Reports
Weekly Sales Analysis Report

This report shows the total sales grouped by weeks. This report gives you an overall picture of your
sales on the reported week.
Reports
230
Monthly Sales Analysis Report

This report shows the total sales grouped by months. This report gives you an overall picture of your
sales on the reported month.
231
Reports
Quarterly Sales Analysis Report

This report shows the total sales grouped by quarters. This report gives you an overall picture of your
sales on the reported quarter.
Reports
Yearly Sales Analysis Report

This report shows the total sales grouped by years. This report gives you an overall picture of your
sales on the reported year.
232
233
Reports
Sales Vs. Inventory Usage By Auto Depletion Report

This report shows you the total sales and the total inventory usage by auto depletion for the report date
range. However, if the auto depletion feature is not turned on, then the inventory usage information
will not be shown in this report.
Reports
234
Labor Vs. Sales By Breakfast, Lunch, & Dinner Report

This report shows the total hourly labor and salary labor cost for the report date range and the grouped
meal time zones as a comparison. This report will be up to the minute and will include employees that
have not clock out yet for the day. With this report, you can have an idea of your hourly labor
allocation. This report could also be used to find out how much sales did each of the meal time zones
generate. The times for the Breakfast, Lunch, and Dinner are defined in Store Settings > General.
235
Reports
Sales By Area Report

This report will show sales information broken down by each area you have defined. An area is defined
by what table group a table is assigned to. The report will show many different aspects of each area.
Reports
236
Gift Certificate List Report

This report shows you all the outstanding gift certificates, along with the balance amount. You can use
this report to have an overview of how many gift certificates are still not yet redeemed.
237
Reports
Gift Certificate Redemption Report

This report will show you the current gift certificate redemptions including the certificate number, order
number, where it was redeemed, and how much was redeemed.
Reports
238
Order Payments Report

This report summarizes all the register collections of order payments with cash, credit cards, or checks.
You can use this report to see a certain order tender type and tender amount, or other information that
you may need.
239
Reports
Other Payments Report

This report summarizes all the register collections or non-order payments with cash, credit cards, or
checks. This report is most likely to include new gift certificate sales collection, or bad check
reimbursement collection. You can use this report to see a certain order tender type and tender amount,
or other information that you may need.
Reports
240
In House Charge Payments Report

This report summarizes the in house charge account payment collection report. You can use this report
to have an overview of the guest accounts that have paid their charges within the specified date range.
241
Reports
Pay Out Details Report

The report shows the payouts for the specified date range. The report will show the recipient, data /
time, amount, description and who paid.
Reports
Manager Cash Out Report

This report will show information on managers cash out details.
242
243
Reports
Refund Details Report

This report shows the refunds performed for the reports specified date range.
Reports
244
Total Payments Received Summary Report

This report shows the total payments received from the money collection transactions. You can use this
report to have an idea of how the total money collection is for all of the monetary transactions in the
report date range.
245
Reports
Customer Info Report

This report shows the customer names, phone number, and sales information. You can use this report
to find out the customers spending at your restaurant.
Reports
Customer Sales By Range Report

This report will show all the customers sales for a specified date range.
246
247
Reports
Specific Customer Purchase Report

With this report, you first specify the customer telephone number. Then all the sales history for this
customer will be shown in this report.
Reports
248
Customer Anniversary Listing Report

This report will show what customers were added to the database by the month specified. This report is
useful to use for marketing to give specials to customers that may be having a birthday. This is
specified in the customers file with the Remember Month button.
249
Reports
Customer Credit List Report

This report will show all the outstanding customer credits available.
Reports
250
Customer Credit Redemption

This report shows the customers credit redemption tracking history. You can use this report to find out
all the credit redemption tracking in the report date range.
251
Reports
Frequent Diner Accounts Report

This report shows the existing frequent diner accounts in a list report. This report will include the
customers name, phone number, number of orders tracked, tracked amount, mailing address, city, state,
zip code and email address.
Reports
Frequent Diner Tracking Report

This report shows the frequent diner tracking information for the specified date range.
252
253
Reports
Frequent Diner Tracking Report

This report will show specific Frequent Diner information for individual accounts.
Reports
Frequent Diner Sales Summary Per Account

This report will tell you what customers spent in your restaurant for the specified date range.
254
255
Reports
In House Charge Accounts Report

This report shows the in house charge account list. You can use this report to review the charge
account customer charge account balance and other information. If a customers account has been
closed, they will not be listed in this report.
Reports
256
In House Charge Tracking Report

This report shows the in house charge tracking information. You can use this report to see the orders
and the charges associated information.
257
Reports
Outstanding Bad Checks Report

This report shows the outstanding bad checks that have been recorded into the system.
Reports
Customer Incidents Report

This report shows the customer incident log information that has been recorded into the system.
258
259
Reports
Active Employees Schedules Report

This report shows the employee schedules as defined in the Employee Schedule data entry screen in
setup.
Reports
Weekly Labor Cost Projection

This report will give you an idea of how much your labor will cost based on your current employee
schedules.
260
261
Reports
Specific Employee Time Cards Report

This report shows specific employees time card information for the specified report date range.
Reports
262
Employee Payroll History Report

This report shows employees payroll history details for the report date range. You can use this report
for historical employee payroll information.
263
Reports
Employee Payroll History Report (Summary)

This report is the same as the Employee Payroll History but only shows a summary of the information.
Reports
Wage Advance Details Report

This report shows employee wage advance payouts. You can use this report to see all the details of
wage advance payouts for the report date range.
264
265
Reports
Dine In Server Performance Report

This report shows the server sales grouped by dine in orders.
Reports
266
Table Group Sales Per Employee Report

This report will show how well an employee did in a certain section of the restaurant. This will give an
idea of how to place your employees while serving customers
267
Reports
Server Gratuity Report

This report shows each of the Dine In server gratuities that were recorded into the POS station, and
other related gratuity information.
Reports
Menu Item Sales By Server Report

This report shows menu item sales information grouped by each server that you can specify.
268
269
Reports
Specific Server Sales By Category Report

This report shows you the amount of money for each category and the total of all money for all of the
categories added together, for the specified server and date range.
Reports
Driver Delivery Summary Report

This report shows all of the delivery drivers net sales, number of deliveries taken, and the
compensation that they received for the specified date range.
270
271
Reports
No Sale Tracking Report

This report will show when No Sale actions were performed.
Reports
Access Denied Tracking Report

This report shows the entire access denied log recorded into the system according to the report date
range.
272
273
Reports
Voids Report
This report shows the entire order void history according to the report date range.
Reports
Time Card Edit Report

This report will show when time cards were edited and by which employee.
274
275
Reports
Employee Files Report

his report will list out all the employees for your restaurant and their employee ID.
Reports
Menu Item List Report

This report lists all of the menu items and the associated forced modifier information.
276
277
Reports
Inventory Shopping List

This report shows you your shopping list based on the inventory auto-depletion.
Reports
278
Purchase Order Received Status Report

This report shows you the purchase orders and their inventory received status. You can use this report
to review which purchase order is still outstanding and not yet received.
279
Reports
Current Inventory On Hand Report

This report shows you what the current inventory on hand based on the automatic inventory depletion.
Reports
280
Inventory Level Report

This report will give you the levels of your entire current inventory. This report is recapped when the
daily closing report (final) is ran, it recaps the current physical inventory on hand, and takes the
previous day's inventory level and perform comparison difference. This report is given as a guide to
find out the usages in physical inventory provided as long as there are previous inventory recap dates so
the initial inventory recaps may not show correctly until there are enough inventory to run the statistics.
281
Reports
Physical Inventory Worksheet

This report allows you to print out the Physical Inventory Count Sheet to use when doing physical
inventory counts.
Reports
282
Menu Profit Analysis Report

This report will show which items are making the most money. This will help weed out items that are
not selling and push the high profit items.
283
Reports
Discount Usage Report

This report shows the discount usage for the report date range. This will also show which employees
are using discounts to track abuse.
Reports
284
Surcharge Usage Report

This report shows the surcharge usage for the report date range. This will also track which employees
are using surcharges.
285
Reports
Menu Modifier Usage Report

This report shows the menu modifier usage for the report date range.
Reports
Specific Menu Category Sales Report

This report shows the menu item sales filtered by the categories. You can use this report to see the
details of the category sales.
286
287
Reports
Menu Item Sales By Stations Report

This report will show which items are selling at what stations
Reports
Menu Item Sales Per Station By Employees

This report will show which items are selling at what stations by what employees.
288
289
Reports
Menu Item Tracking By Printer Locations

This report will show which printer locations are seeing what menu items printed.
Reports
Caller ID Tracking Report

This report shows the caller id log for all of the calls that have been recorded into the system.
290
291
Reports
Delivery Timing Report

This report shows the delivery tips timing information for the specified date range.
Reports
292
Drive Thru Timing Report

You can use this report to see the drive thru order timing information. It will give you an idea of how
fast your drive thru window is performing.
293
Reports
Cashier Out Report

You can use this report to review cashier sign out summary report. It will give you an overview of each
of the cashiers and any register over/shortages.
Reports
Cashier Discrepancy Report

You can use this report to review the register discrepancies that have been recorded into the system.
The Cashier Sign Outs Report will also show this information as well.
294
295
Reports
Bank Deposit Report

You can use this report to see all the deposit slips created with the Bank Deposit feature.
Reports
296
Tax Report
You can use this report to see the sales tax liability for the report date range. It will also show the nontaxable or tax-exempt sales information.
297
Field Name Descriptions
Part 4
Appendix
Chapter 26
298
299
Store Settings
General
Field Name
Description
Store Name
Your restaurant name is displayed in this field. This info cannot be

changed unless you change your registration info with Aldelo Systems
Inc.
Premise Address
Your physical address that you registered this program under will appear
in this field. This info cannot be changed unless your registration info
with Aldelo Systems Inc. is changed.
Premise Postal Code
Enter your physical zip code here. This information is gathered when you
first create a new database. Three prompts will appear. The first prompt
is the zip code which will be used in this field.
Area Code + Phone No.
Your restaurant telephone number that you registered will show in this
field. This info cannot be changed unless your registration info with
Aldelo Systems Inc. is changed.
Default Area Code
The number you enter in this field will be the default area code anytime
you need to enter a phone number in the system. This will show up in
Take Out and Delivery Orders.
Site Number
If your restaurant is part of a chain of store and a site number was issued
to you, then enter that number here.
Mailing Address
Your restaurants mailing address. This address is the address used when
creating In House Charge Account billing statements for a return address.
Mailing Postal Code
Your restaurants mailing postal code. When you enter a zip code into this
field, the field to the right will be auto-populated with the city and state of
this zip code.
Side Bar Logo
This field allows you to choose a picture to display on the main screen of
the POS. To select a picture click on the button with three dots on it and
to remove a picture click on the button with the red X through it. The
image size for this picture should not exceed 1000x1400 pixels.
Daily Start Time
This field allows you to specify your restaurants daily start time. This
time should be about two to three hours after your establishment closes.
For example if your establishment closes for at 3 am then this field should
be set to 6 or 7 am. If your establishment is open 24 hours a day, you
would find out what time your establishment is usually not busy and enter
that time here. So for example if it is slow at around 3 in the morning, you
should select 4:00AM to give yourself time to do the closing reports and
any other daily managerial tasks. If you are experiencing reports that are
not matching, this could be the culprit.
300
Lunch Start Time
This field allows you to specify the lunch start time, for reporting
purposes. For reporting purposes this option will affect the Labor vs.
Sales By Breakfast, Lunch, and Dinner report in the Back Office under
Reports in the Sales category.
Dinner Start Time
This field allows you to specify the dinner start time, for reporting
purposes. For reporting purposes this option will affect the Labor vs
Sales By Breakfast, Lunch, and Dinner report in the Back Office under
Reports in the Sales category.
Telephone Display
Format
This field allows you to adjust the telephone format. This is especially
useful for countries other than the United States that have less than or
more than 10 digits in their phone number.
Server Computer Name
This field is used to enter the server name that is hosting the database.
The database must be located on this system for this setting to take effect.
Many functions in Aldelo For Restaurants depend on this setting. Caller
ID, Time Synchronization, Setting Changes, Table Status Changes, and
Central Gift Card operations (when Gift Card Server is used)
Server TCP/IP Address
This field is used to enter the IP address of the server computer. This will
be the address of the computer defined in the Server Computer Name
setting. This setting should always be used in conjunction with the
previous setting.
Server TCP/IP Port

Number
This field is used to enter the port number that Aldelo For Restaurants
will use to communicate on. This is usually only used if you have
firewalls in between the server and the pos stations. Make sure you allow
this port number to be passed through the firewall if one is present.
Auto Restart All

Computers
This option will automatically restart all the computers at a specified time.
The database/server computer will restart 30 seconds later to ensure all
clients are logged off the database. If your client computers boot up faster
than your server computer, they may complain that they cannot find the
database. This is true since the server computer is still booting up.
Auto Shut Down All

Computers
This option will automatically shut down all computers at a specified

time. The database/server computer will shut down 30 seconds later to
ensure all clients are logged off the database.
Auto Trigger Time
This field is used to specify the time that all systems should either Auto
Shut Down or Auto Restart.
Display Special Message

During Login
This option will show your special message whenever an employee enters
their access code. Managers can use this to alert the servers of the daily
specials or maybe special promotions. This message will be displayed in
place of the Side Bar Logo.
Special Message
This field is where you will enter the special message that employees will
see. This message will show up on the Main screen anytime an employee
is required to enter their access code.
301

Taxes > Tax 1
Field Name
Description
Alias Name
This will be the name of the tax. This will affect what the tax is called
throughout the software including in the reports.
Tax 1 (%)
Enter a tax percentage you wish to apply to menu items in this field. The
percent is expressed as an actual value so you only have to enter the
number in this field.
Apply Tax on Surcharge
This option will apply Tax 1 on a Surcharge if one is used on a guest

check. Surcharges can be setup in the Back Office under Setup > General
Settings > Surcharges.
Apply Tax on Delivery

Charge
This option will apply Tax 1 on a Delivery Charge if one is used on a

guest check.
Taxes > Tax 2
Field Name
Description
Alias Name
Tax 2 (%)


Charge

guest check.
Tax Code Character
You can place a character in this field to show up on the guest check
notifying you of which items on the receipt have this tax applied to them.
Tax Is Included in Item

Price
Check this box if you are using Tax 2 and your tax is already included in
the price of the menu item. The tax that has been included in the item
price will be reported in the Tax Report located in the Back Office under
Reports > Other > Tax Report.
Hide Inclusive Tax From

Guest Check
This feature will allow you to hide the inclusive tax collected amount
from the guest receipt.
Trigger Tax Exemption

When Sub Total is Less
Than
This feature will cause Tax 2 to be added from a guest check AFTER the
defined amount has been reached. For example, if you wanted all orders
under $2.00 to be tax exempt then enter 2 in this field. If this value is set
to 4.01, it will enable the options for use in Ontario, Canada.
Apply Tax on Previous

Tax Amount
This option will tax the sum of Tax 1 and Tax 2.
302
Taxes > Tax 3

Field Name
Description
Alias Name
Tax 3 (%)


Charge

guest check.
Apply Tax on Previous

Tax Amount
This option will tax the sum of Tax 2 and Tax 3. If this option is checked
and Tax 2 also has this option checked then it will tax the sum of Tax 1, 2
and 3.
Taxes > Other Options
Field Name
Apply Discounts After
Taxes
Description
This option will apply discounts after taxes have been applied.
Apply Credit After Taxes This option will apply a credit after taxes have been applied.
Tax Exempt Sale Security
This option will specify the minimum security level need to make a sale
tax exempt.
Tax Exemption Alias

Name
This field will specify an alias name for tax exemption. For example if
you wanted your tax exemption to say Tax Already Included then enter
that in this field
Tax Account Info To

Print on Guest Check
This field allows you to enter the Tax Account number issued to your
restaurant by the government. This field can also be used to enter any
other tax account information. This information will show up on the top
of the guest check. This info can be the ABN number used in Australia of
the GST number used in Canada.
303

Services > Dine In
Field Name
Description
Dine In
This option will enable or disable the ability to take Dine In orders.
Alias Name
If you would like to have the Dine In order type appear as something other
than Dine In then enter that name in this field. For example if you wanted
Dine In to show as Sit Down in the main POS screen then type Sit
Down in this field.
Show Retail Screen
This option will default the system to the barcode entry screen for Dine In
type orders.
Tax Exempt
Check this box if tax does not apply.
Dine In Automatic
Surcharge
Choose a surcharge in this drop down list to apply to every Dine In order
automatically.
Bar Automatic Surcharge
Choose a surcharge in this drop down list to apply to every Bar Tab order
automatically.
Prompt for customer

name at dine in
completion
This option will prompt for a customer name at the end of a Dine In order.
Prompt for customer

name at bar tab
completion
This option will prompt for a customer name at the end of a Bar Tab
order.
Skip Table Selection
This option will skip the Table selection screen and take you directly to
the Order Entry screen.
Track Guest Number for

Dine In Orders
This option controls if the software will ask for the number of guests
when a new order is created.
Warn Drink Per Guest

Policy
This option will warn the user that they have not ordered at least one drink
per guest on the ticket. Menu items must be marked as Bar Drink Items
for this option to function correctly.
Enforce Drink Per Guest

Policy
This option will force the user to order at least one menu item per guest
marked as a Bar Drink Item.
304
Prompt Seat Number on

Startup
This option will show the seat selection screen when a new Din In order
is created.
Prompt Seat Number on

Each Item
This option will show the seat selection screen for each item ordered
when in the order entry screen.
Show Seat Assignment

Reminder on Done for
Dine In Orders
This option will remind the user to assign each item on the guest check to
a seat when the Done button is selected.
Force Seat Assignment

Reminder on Done
This option will force the user to assign each item on the guest check to a
seat when the Done button is selected.
Force Clear Settled Dine

In Table
This option will force the user to clear the table in the table
Occupied Table Cannot

Create New Ticket
This option will not allow tables with orders to have new order created.
Services > Take Out
Field Name
Description
Take Out
This option will enable or disable the ability to take Take Out orders.
Alias Name
If you would like to have the Take Out order type appear as something
other than Take Out then enter that name in this field. For example if you
wanted Take Out to show as Carry Out in the main POS screen then
type Carry Out in this field.
Tax Exempt
Show Retail Screen
This option will default the system to the barcode entry screen for Take
Out type orders.
Take Out Automatic

Surcharge
Choose a surcharge in this drop down list to apply to every Take Out
order automatically.
Prompt for customer

name at take out
completion
This option will prompt for a customer name at the end of a Take Out
order.
Require Phone # For

Take Out
This option will require that a phone number be entered in for all Take
Out type orders. By default the user can just press enter when the area
code is displayed and the system will let them in. You can use this option
in conjunction with the option found in Store Settings > Staff CRM >
Enforce Exact Telephone Number Digits to ensure the best possible
tracking of customer telephone numbers.
305
New Customer Take Out

on Hold
This option tells the software to print a Hold Until Arrival message on
the kitchen ticket. This only applies to Take Out orders placed by a
previously non-existent customer. This option is helpful if your
establishment has problems with new customers calling in take out orders
and then never showing up.
Services > Take Out

Field Name
Description
Drive Thru
This option will enable or disable the ability to take Drive Thru orders.
Alias Name
If you would like to have the Drive Thru order type appear as something
other than Drive Thru then enter that name in this field. For example if
you wanted Drive Thru to show as Drive Up Window in the main POS
screen then type Drive Up Window in this field.
Tax Exempt
Show Retail Screen
This option will default the system to the barcode entry screen for Drive
Thru type orders.
Drive Thru Automatic

Surcharge
Choose a surcharge in this drop down list to apply to every Drive Thru
Prompt for customer

name at Drive Thru
completion
This option will prompt for a customer name at the end of a Drive Thru
order.
Disable Drive Thru

Timing Feature
This option disables the Drive Thru screen that shows up when you click
on Drive Thru.
Drive Thru Orders Use

Drive Thru Stations
This option only allows Drive Thru orders to only be settled at Drive Thru
stations.
Services > Delivery
Field Name
Description
Delivery
This option will enable or disable the ability to take Delivery orders.
Alias Name
If you would like to have the Delivery order type appear as something
other than Delivery then enter that name in this field. For example if you
wanted Delivery to show as Home Service in the main POS screen then
type Home Service in this field.
306
Tax Exempt
Show Retail Screen
This option will default the system to the barcode entry screen for
Delivery type orders.
Delivery Automatic
Surcharge
Choose a surcharge in this drop down list to apply to every Delivery

Prompt for customer

name at Delivery
completion
This option will prompt for a customer name at the end of a Delivery
order.
Show Driver Dispatch

Screen
This option will show a list of all your drivers when you click Driver in
the Main POS screen instead of the default login screen. This is a useful
feature in speeding up your driver departures and arrivals. This will
however, allow employees to assign orders to other drivers and should be
used with caution.
Enable Driver Money

Drop
This feature will enable the Money Drop button settle all CASH
payment deliveries in one transaction. Credit Cards and Checks must be
settled separately.
WARNING: It is recommended that you completely settle Credit Card transactions

before the order is taken for delivery. The order cannot be settled by the person
delivering the order if the order was not completely settled by the person creating the
order. The issue only arises when the person creating the order and the person
delivering the order are different. Orders settled with Checks need to be settled after
the order has been delivered but BEFORE the Money Drop is performed.
Enable Popup Streets
This option will show a list of streets to choose from when entering the
delivery street address. This option makes selecting the street a little
simpler. This list of streets is generated from all the streets that have
been entered into Aldelo For Restaurants in the Back Office.
Round Delivery Total To

Next Quarter
This option will round the delivery total to the nearest quarter.
307

This field will determine the global default for delivery charge. The
order in which delivery charges are applied is:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Delivery Charge
Customer Level
Street Level
Postal Code Level
Global Level
The higher settings on the list override the lower settings on the list. For
example Customer Level settings override Postal Code Level settings.
Delivery Comp
This field will determine the global default for delivery compensation.
This feature follows the same order as Delivery Charge above.
Chained Delivery
Charge/Comp Per Trip
This option will charge the delivery charge and compensation only on the
first order in a chained set of orders.
Delivery Charge/Comp
Per Menu Item
This option will charge the delivery charge and compensation only for
items that have a delivery charge/comp specified in the Menu Item
Editor. Items without a delivery charge/comp specified will not have a
delivery charge/comp applied.
Delivery Charge Percent

Based
This option will charge your delivery fees on a percentage basis instead
of a dollar basis.
Delivery Comp Percent

Based
This option will charge your delivery compensation on a percentage basis

instead of a dollar basis.
Revenue > Payments
Field Name
Description
Check
This option will enable or disable the ability to take checks as a form of
payment.
Enable Check Scan
This option is used if you are using an MICR reader and wish to verify if
checks are approved or declined based on your own bad check records in
your Aldelo for Restaurants software. With this feature enabled whenever
you scan a check the software will, if declined, give you a message stating
the Check Acceptance was Declined/Please Do not accept this check as
payment for this order. However if the check is NOT declined the system
will assume the check is good. This information only applies to check
records previously entered into the system and in no way verifies the
validity of the check presented by a customer with no Bad Check history
on file in the system.
308
Visa
This option will enable or disable the ability to take Visa as a form of
payment.
MasterCard
This option will enable or disable the ability to take MasterCard as a form
of payment.
American Express
This option will enable or disable the ability to take American Express as
a form of payment.
Discover
This option will enable or disable the ability to take Discover as a form of
payment.
Carte Blanche
This option will enable or disable the ability to take Carte Blanche as a
form of payment.
Diners Club
This option will enable or disable the ability to take Diners Club as a
form of payment.
ATM/Debit Card
This option will enable or disable the ability to take ATM/Debit Card as a
form of payment.
In House Charge
This option will enable or disable the ability to take In House Charge as a
form of payment.
Days Due
This drop down list allows you to specify how long the customer has to
pay their in house charges. For example if you specify 15 then the
payment will be due 15 days after that charge is created. If you do not
want to specify a due date, select Due Upon Receipt.
This field allows you to specify what an account must have in the name
Remote In House Account field for a ticket to be printed at the remote in house printer. For example
if you wanted all accounts with Room in the first name field to print a
Marker
ticket at the remote printer then simply type Room in this field.
Revenue > Gratuity
Field Name
Description
Tip % on Dine In Server

Sales
This field lets you specify what percentage you want to appear at the
bottom of the Server Dine-In Sales report, so that the server will now how
much they should have made in tips based on the percentage specified
here. For example if you had an order of $9.65 and the servers tip was
$3.35. The I.R.S. requires the restaurant to report at least 8% of the
servers tips which in this case would be $0.77. If you need a second
reference point like maybe 10%, then the Server Dine-In Sales Report
would also include a line to show the 10% which in this case would be
$0.96. Enter 0 if you do not want this to show at all.
Auto Tip Alias Name
This field will specify an alias name for the Auto Gratuity.
309
Auto Print Server Tip

Claim Receipt
This option tells the software to print a Server Claim Receipt for the
servers tips. This way the cashier can collect the servers tips and the
server can pick them up them during a slow period or at the end of their
shift. For example if the customer brings the check up to the cashier to
pay and pays the gratuity to the cashier instead of leaving it on the table,
the cashier will get a receipt to put into the cash drawer to keep track of
the servers tips.
Auto Gratuity Percent
This field allows you to specify the percentage that you want your Auto
Gratuity to charge. For example, if you want to charge 15% tip on the
total amount of the order enter 15 here. If your restaurant charges Auto
Gratuity based on the number of guests, you will need to setup the
number of guests in the next check box below.
Use Auto Gratuity

Percent When Guests At
or Exceed
This field will determine the number of guests before the Auto Gratuity
percent is applied to the order.
Dine In Do Not Apply

Auto Tip
This option will not apply Auto Gratuity to Dine In orders.
Auto Tip at Bar Tab
This option will apply Auto Gratuity to Bar Tab orders.
Auto Tip at Take Out
This option will apply Auto Gratuity to Take Out orders.
Auto Tip at Drive Thru
This option will apply Auto Gratuity to Drive Thru orders.
Auto Tip at Delivery
This option will apply Auto Gratuity to Delivery orders.
310
Revenue > Cashier

Field Name
Description
Change Due Show

Original
This option will show the amount of the ticket as well as the change that is
due when the Change Due screen appears.
Auto Tip at Delivery
This option will apply Auto Gratuity to Delivery orders.
No Sale Show Alert
This option will show an on screen alert with the employees name any
time a No Sale is performed.
Record Credit Card

Number in Order
Settlement
This option will record the customers credit card numbers when settling.
This option will only work if credit card integration is not used. The
credit card numbers will be recorded to the customers name field on the
actual recalled order receipt after it has been settled. This violates CISP
regulations and is not recommended due to any employee being able to
see the credit card numbers in plain text.
Blind Cashier Close Out
This option enables a Blind Close button in the cashier money count
screen. When this button is used the system will automatically assume
that all the money that should have been collected was collected and for
the correct amount.
Enable Staff Banking
This option enables the use of Staff Banking by employees.
Auto Start Staff Bank

When Clock In
This option will automatically start the employees Staff Bank when they
clock in. The start amount of the Staff Bank when they start it will be
$0.00
Credit Card Tips

Percentage Fee Charged
to Server
This option will take money out of your servers credit cards tips to pay
for the processing fee charged by the credit card processing company.
This option will only report the number and not actually reduce the
amount owed.
Automatic Reduction of
credit card tip fees from
staff banks
This option will automatically reduce the credit card tip fee from the staff
bank instead of just reporting the money owed.
311

Revenue > Other Options
Field Name
Description
Printers Currency
Symbol Hex Value
This field will specify the printers currency symbol represented as a hex
value. Your printers technical manual or programmers manual should
have these values.
Custom Currency
Denominations
This field lets you select your own custom currency denominations. To
specify the currency amount, click on the button with 3 dots on it and
enter the denomination amount. Repeat this until all denominations are
entered up to 12 different denominations. To remove the custom currency
amount simply click on the button with the red X through it. These values
will replace the values in the Money Count screen when you are cashing
out.
Amount Due Automatic

Round To Nearest
This option will round the total to the nearest amount entered in this field.
The amount can be from 0.05 to 1.00. The delivery round to nearest
quarter will supersede this option.

Daily Closing Reminder
#1-6
312
In these fields you can enter in up to 6 different reminders which will

appear everyday when the closing report is run. When you complete each
task or reminder, click on the button to mark it as complete. This will
enable the Continue button.
Receipts > Guest Check

Field Name
Description
Store Message
This field will display a message directly below your restaurant name and
info on the guest receipt. For example the best steak in town could go
in this field. This field can also be used if your registration name was too
long when registering the software. For example if your name was The
Little Hole in the Wall Grill and Pub you could register it as The Little
Hole in the Wall and use the Grill and Pub as the store message.
Hide Ticket Number

From Guest Check
This option will hide the ticket number from the printer guest check.
313
Hide Time From Guest

Check
This option will not print the time on the guest check.
Show Delivery Cust. Sales

Info
This option will show the customers info on the guest receipt for delivery
orders. This info includes the Total Orders To-Date and the Total Spent
To-Date.
Hide Hold Time on

Printed Check
This option will die the orders hold time from the printed guest check.
Show Ordered Items

Individually
This option will show the ordered items on screen separately instead of
combining them. For example with this option checked if you order 2
cokes it will appear as 1 coke and 1 coke. By default it will appear as 2
cokes.
Hide Voided Item From

Printed Guest Check
This option will hide the voided items on the printed guest check.
Hide Modifier Cost From

Printer Check
This option will die the cost of the modifiers from the printed guest
receipt.
Hide No Cost Modifier

From Printed Check
This option will hide the modifiers with NO cost from the printed guest
receipt.
Guest Check Print

Description
This option will print the description of the menu item that is defined in
the Menu Item Editor.
Print Tip Line On Guest

Check
This option will print a tip amount line on the guest receipt. This feature
is a good tip reminder.
Always Show Guest

Check Tip Line
This option will always put a tip line on the guest check regardless of tips
already entered or allocated.
Show Food/Bar Subtotals

on Guest Check
This option will show a subtotal for the food items ordered on a ticket
and the subtotal for the bar items that were ordered on that ticket.
Guest Check Message
Enter a message that you want to print on the Guest Receipt in this field.
For example if you wanted the bottom of your check to say Thank you
and have a nice day then you would enter that message in this field.
314
Show Tip Sugg. On

Check Based on Order
Total
This option will put the tip suggestion amount based on the Tip
Suggestion percentage button below this option.
Click Here to Enter Tip

Suggestion Percentage
Click this button if you want to enter a tip percentage suggestion at the
bottom of the Guest Receipt. When you use this option it will ask you for
a percentage. If you say 10% then the software will add a line like 10%
Tip, Or The Value Of <10>. You can edit everything in this line except
the <10>. This info is used by the software to calculate the suggested tip.
So you might change it to say Please leave a tip of <10> or something
to that affect.
315

Receipts > Kitchen / Bar
Field Name
Description
Hide Ticket Number

This option will hide the ticket number form the printed kitchen / bar chit.
From Kitchen / Bar Chits
Hide Time from Kitchen /
This option will not print the time on the kitchen / bar receipt.
Bar Receipt
Show Kitchen / Bar
Modifier in Red
This option will print the modifier in the kitchen using red.
Disable Kitchen
Coordination
This option tells the software to disable the kitchen coordination feature.
With this option selected the kitchen and bar receipts will not see the
Being Made On Other Stations message when printing to multiple bar
or kitchen printers.
Kitchen / Bar Chits Show

Item Price
This option will print the prices of the items on the kitchen and bar chits.
Kitchen / Bar Chits Show

Modifier Price
This option will print the modifier price on the kitchen and bar chits.
Show Recipe Summary

on Kitchen Copy
This option will print a summary of the items recipes on the kitchen chit.
A recipe must be created for the menu item before this option will work.
Kitchen / Bar Print

Description
This option will print the description of the menu item that is defined in
the Menu Item Editor. Any item description you want to display will
require a >> in front of the description.
Receipts > Other Options
Field Name
Description
Closing Report Show

Sales By Order Types
This option will show the sales in the closing report by Order type such as
Dine In, Take Out, etc. With this option enabled the closing reports will
give a report of all sales and orders taking in the various order types.
Guest / Packager Receipt

Title Print in Red For
Delivery Orders
This option will print the title of the Guest and Packager receipts in red.
This option if enabled will disable the ability of the kitchen printer to print
in red so keep this in mind.
Guest Check, Kitchen

And Bar Chits Show
Postal Code
This option will print the postal code on the kitchen, bar, and guest
receipts.
Hide Order # From

Receipts
This option will hide the Order # of the order from the Guest Receipt.
Hide Order # From

Charge Slip
This option will hide the order # from the credit card charge slip.

Hide Time From Daily
Receipt Summary
316
This option will not print the time on the daily receipt summary.
Print > Guest Check
Field Name
Description
Print Guest Check on

Send
This option will print the guest check whenever the Done, Settle, or
Cash Tender buttons are clicked in the Order Entry screen.
Print Two Copies of

Guest Checks
This option will print two copies of the guest check.
Re-Print Check Need

Manager Override
This option will require a manager to approve a reprint of a ticket.
Smart Seat Handling
This option will group menu items on the guest check by seat numbers if
seats are specified.
Show Total Per Seat
This option will show the total per seat on the guest check. The taxes for
each seat are not based on the items per seat but the total tax divided
among the seats.
This option will disable printing a guest check from Order Entry for Dine
Do Not Print Guest
Check for Dine In Orders In orders.
In Order Entry
Do Not Print Guest
Check for Take Out
(Phoned In) Orders In
Order Entry
This option will disable printing a guest check from Order Entry for Take
Out orders.
Do Not Print Guest

Check for Take Out
(Walk In) Orders In
Order Entry
Out orders.
Do Not Print Guest

Check for Drive Thru
Orders In Order Entry
Out orders.
Do Not Print Guest

Check for Delivery
Orders In Order Entry
This option will disable printing a guest check from Order Entry for
Delivery orders.
317

Print > Kitchen / Bar
Field Name
Enable Smart Kitchen

Printing
Description
Print Kitchen copy with menu items combined and modifiers listed
separately for each item.
318
Enable Smart Bar

Printing
Print Bar items combined and modifiers listed separately for each item.
Sort Kitchen Items

Automatically on Kitchen
Chits
This option tells the software to automatically print the menu items on
the kitchen copy in order of their sort number which is defined in the
Menu Item Editor for that menu item. For example if in the menu item
editor you specified all menu items that classified as appetizers had a sort
number of 1 and all menu items that classified as salads had a sort
number of 2 then on the kitchen receipt the appetizers would be listed
first and the salads second on the kitchen ticket.
Enable Delayed Send

Order Feature
This option will enable hold functions in the software. The software
must be running on the server computer for this option to work properly.
Print Kitchen / Bar Item

On the Fly
This option will print each item to the kitchen once the next item is
clicked.
Delay Auto Print To

Kitchen / Bar On Settle
This option will delay the print to the kitchen until the order is
completely settled and payment has been received when using the
Settle button in order entry.
Print > Multilingual
Field Name
Description
Guest Check Show Sec

Lang Also
This option will print the secondary language that has been specified (if
any) in addition to the primary language on the guest copy of the check.
Packager Receipt Print

Secondary Language
This option will print the packager receipt in the secondary language as
well as the primary language.
Packager Print
Secondary Lang. Only
This option will print ONLY the secondary language at the packager
printer
Kitchen / Bar Print Both

Languages
This option will print both the primary and secondary languages on the
kitchen / bar chit.
Kitchen Use Secondary

Language
This option will print the kitchen chit in the secondary language that has
been specified.
Bar Use Secondary

Language
This option will print the bar chit in the secondary language that has been
specified.
Kitchen Language
This drop down list will specify the language that will be printed in the
kitchen. The items that will be affected are everything on the chit except
for the menu items and the menu modifiers. This will override any other
language settings that you may have in the system.
319

Bar Language
This drop down list will specify the language that will be printed in the
bar. The items that will be affected are everything on the chit except for
the menu items and the menu modifiers. This will override any other
language settings that you may have in the system.
Print > Packager Receipt
Field Name
Description
Copies of Packager
Receipts for Dine In
Orders
This drop down list will specify the number of packager receipt copies
that will be printed at the packager printer for Dine In orders.
Copies of Packager
Receipts for Phoned In
Orders
that will be printed at the packager printer for Phoned In orders.
Copies of Packager
Receipts for Walk In
Orders
that will be printed at the packager printer for Walk In orders.
Copies of Packager
Receipts for Drive Thru
Orders
that will be printed at the packager printer for Drive Thru orders.
Copies of Packager
Receipts for Delivery
Orders
that will be printed at the packager printer for Delivery orders.
Print > Customer Receipt
Field Name
Description
Auto Print Receipt When

This option will print ALL receipts (except guest check) automatically.
Finished
Gift Cert/Cust Credit
Print 2 Copies of Receipt
This option will print 2 copies of the Gift Card or credit receipts. These
receipts are good to keep at the restaurant in case the customer forgets to
bring their Gift Card or receipt in when they are ready to use it.
Paid Out Print 2 Copies

of Receipt
This option will print 2 copies of the Pay Out receipt. By default the
software will only print 1 copy of the Pay Out receipt.
320
Print > Other Options

Field Name
Description
Asian and Ultra Print

Font Name
This field lets you specify the name of the font that you would like to use
for the Ultra Large and Asian Printer types. For example if you want to
use the Times New Roman font you would type Times New Roman
in this field. The font used in this field must be a fixed width font or
receipts will not print out correctly.
Asian/Ultra Large
Kitchen Printer Extra
Line Feed
This field allows you to specify extra line feeds for Asian and Ultra large
printer types. Simply enter 0-9 to specify more line feeds at the end of the
paper. This is useful if the printer is stopping before the text has cleared
the tear-bar or the auto-cutter.
Asian/Ultra Large Bar

Printer Extra Line Feed
This field allows you to specify extra line feeds for Asian and Ultra large
printer types. Simply enter 0-9 to specify more line feeds at the end of the
paper. This is useful if the printer is stopping before the text has cleared
the tear-bar or the auto-cutter.
Normal Desktop Printer

Font Size
This field lets you specify the font size that will print on your normal
desktop printer. This is helpful if you would like to print your reports in a
larger or smaller font.
Windows Printer
Columns Per Line
These fields allow you to adjust the columns on the receipt. The lower the
number in these fields the fewer columns will be used for the receipt.
This will have the effect of squishing the receipt in case the text is not
all fitting on the receipt.
Staff / CRM
Field Name
Description
Pay Period
This drop down list lets you specify the pay periods for your payroll.
Weekly: Once a week
Bi-Weekly: Once every two weeks
Semi-Monthly: The 1st and the 15th of each month.
Monthly: Once every month.
Work Week End Day
This drop down list lets you specify what the last work day is in every
week. Simply drop the list down and select the day of the week that you
want. This is only for reporting purposes and has NO affect on the
payroll functions.
Clock Out Reminder

After (Minutes)
This field lets you specify the number of minutes an employee can be
clocked in, over there scheduled clock out time, before the system will
flash a reminder notifying the user to clock out. This feature is useful if
you have employees that forget to clock out when they leave.
Over Time Basis
This drop down list will specify how overtime will be calculated. Other
will enable more advanced features found in the registry.
321
Over Time After (Hours)
This field lets you specify the total number of hours that must be worked
before overtime is given. For example if you give your employees
overtime after 40 hours per week, then simply enter 40 in this field. If
you give them overtime after 8 hours per day then simply put 8 in this
field.
Over Time Hour %
This field allows you to specify how much percent of the original pay is
paid during over time. For example if you pay your employees time and
a half for overtime, then simply put 150 in this field.
Force Hourly Employee

Clock in Before Use
System
This option will force any employee that is set up as an hourly employee
to clock into the system before they will be allowed to continue.
Employee with Multi Job

Selection
This option will allow your employees can have more than one job. To
setup an employee with two jobs, the employee must have two records
that are the same with a few minor differences. The first is their access
code, the access code on the second record must not be known by the
employee. The second is their job title. These must be different when
setting up an employee with two jobs.
Take Out / Delivery Show

Search Type
This option will prompt the user to select the search type that they would
like to use to bring up the customers file. For example with this option
enabled then whenever you get the customer lookup window (like when
going to Take Out) you will be able to choose how to look for the
customer, either by MSR Card, Account Code, Customer Name, or Phone
number. By default you can only search by phone number.
Enforce Exact Telephone

Number Digits
This option will enforce the number of digits (specified in Store Settings
> General under Telephone Display Format) when the user must enter a
phone number. This helps to eliminate user entering incomplete numbers
for customers telephone.
Auto Create Freq. Diner

Reward
This option will automatically create the Frequent Diner rewards once a
frequent diner account qualifies for the rewards.
Minimum Check
This field allows you to specify the minimum check amount needed for
an order to qualify for Frequent Diner Reward Points. For example if
you want only checks over $40.00 to qualify for reward points then
simply enter 40 in this field.
Tracking Begin Time
This field allows you to specify the time of the day that the Frequent
Diner tracking begins, this way you can only offer Frequent Diner
tracking and points between certain times. For example if you want the
tracking to begin at 8:00 am then enter 8am in this field.

Tracking End Time
322
This field allows you to specify the time of day the Frequent Diner
tracking ends. For example if you want the tracking to end at 9:00 pm
then simply enter 9pm in this field.
Freq Points Expire Days
This field lets you specify the number of days that customers have to
redeem frequent diner points before they expire. Since this field will not
need to be changed on a daily basis, you will not be able to edit this field.
If you need to edit this field, place the cursor in this field and then press
the Insert key on your keyboard and enter the number of days.
Minimum Checks Count
This field lets you specify the number of checks a customer must have
before they can qualify for Frequent Diner point tracking.
Minimum Checks Total
This field lets you specify the minimum combined total of ALL orders
that a customer has placed before they qualify for Frequent Diner point
tracking. For example the customer will have to spend $500.00 TOTAL
to qualify for a credit.
Reward Credit Amount
This field lets you specify how much credit will be awarded to qualifying
customers. For example, if you want to give the customer a $30 credit,
simply enter 30 in this field.
Tech Tip: The options below only apply if you are using the Aldelo Gift Card Server.
These should be left blank if you are not using the server software. The options below
replace and simplify the setup procedures in the older version of the Gift Card Server.
GCS Site Number
This field allows you to enter a site number for this location when using
the Aldelo Gift Card Server software. This software is not included in the
Aldelo for Restaurants package but is another module you can purchase.
GCS Server IP
This field allows you to enter the IP address of the CGS Server. This IP
address must be the IP address of the static IP given to you by your ISP.
GCS Server Port
This field allows you to enter the port number of the port you are using to
allow CGS to communicate.
323

Products > Modifiers
Field Name
Description
Menu / Modifier Font

Size
This field lets you specify the size of the font that will appear on your
menu items and menu modifiers. This only affects the screen and will not
change your printer font size.
Sort Menu Sub Items /

Forced Modifiers
This option will sort the Sub Level Items alphabetically.
Persist Manual Modifier

Price Change
This option tells the software that when the user manually enters the price
of a modifier then that price will be the new price of that modifier until it
is changed. By default, without this option enabled, the software will
always keep its price that was entered in during setup and will not change
when a manual price is entered for it.
Hide NOTE From Touch

Modifier Screen
This option will hide the Note button in the Modifier screen in Order
Entry. This option is helpful if you do not want your wait staff to put
notes on the orders.
Hide Half
This option will disable the Half modifier type. This option is useful for
saving space on the modifier type selection list in the Modifier screen in
Order Entry.
Hide Toppings
This option will disable the Toppings modifier type. This option is
useful for saving space on the modifier type selection list in the Modifier
screen in Order Entry.
Hide Bar Mixing
This option will disable the Bar Mixing modifier type. This option is
useful for saving space on the modifier type selection list in the Modifier
screen in Order Entry.
Hide All
This option will disable the All modifier type. This option is useful for
saving space on the modifier type selection list in the Modifier screen in
Order Entry.
This option will disable the Finish button that will appear on the forced
Disable FINISH button in modifier selection window in Order Entry. This option is useful if you
dont want the users to have the ability skip any of the forced modifier
Forced Modifiers
choices.
This option will automatically select the forced modifier if there is only
Auto Select Single Forced one choice that can be made. For example, if you only have fries as a
force modifier choice, then you can select this option to always auto-select
Modifier
fried with the menu item.
Modifier Builder #1-8
This field lets you specify the eight master modifier builder types. These
serve as a basis for the modifier builder screen. At least one will need to
be entered in order to use the Modifier Builder Template Setup in the
Back Office.
324
Products > Pizza

Field Name
Description
Proportioned Pizza
Topping Charge
This option will charge half price for a topping if it is put on only half the
pizza. This option also works with using thirds and quarter pricing
methods.
Half Topping Half Price

on EVEN Qty
This option will charge half price on a topping when the total toppings
ordered is an even quantity. For example; if you order a pizza and the
pizza will be divided into two, four, six, etc. sections, this option will
charge half price for each of the toppings. If you order a pizza and the
pizza will have three, five, or seven sections this option will charge full
price for those toppings.
Do Not use 4 x 1.5

Large Label For Pizza
Label Printing
This option allows the user to use the 1 x 3 labels for printing pizza
labels.
Products > Inventory
Field Name
Description
Enable Auto Inventory

Depletion By Sales
This option will enable the automatic inventory depletion. This in

combination with a few other features will enable you to automatically
deplete items from your inventory.
Monitor Inventory Level

When Ordering
This option will display a warning message when an item is ordered and
there are not enough inventory items to make the item. This will not
provide a countdown of the inventory but it will notify the user that the
inventory items are no longer in stock.
Minimum Recipe Profit

%
This field allows you to specify the minimum profit that should be made
for all of the menu items. This option is used for inventory tracking and
is pretty much just an idea of the profit for the software. Using the
appropriate reports, you will be generating a report of your profit and
losses for you menu recipes. Default is 100%
Products > Other Options
Field Name
Open Price Item Ask
Description
Description
This option tells the software to prompt the user to enter a description of
the item anytime that an open price item is ordered. To use an open price
item use 1234.56 as the default item price when in the Menu Item Editor.
325
Do Not Auto Hide Sub

Menu Item Page
This option will keep the sub-level item page up when ordering menu
items. By default this page will close and make you reselect the top level
item. For example if you have a top level item called Domestic Beer and
when you click on this it gives you the option of ordering several
different types. If you select a Budweiser, the software will close this
window and require you to select Domestic Beer again to order another
Budweiser. With this option the window with the Budweiser and all
other types of beer will stay active and allow you to order several beers
before you are finished.
Menu Auto Price

Percentage Based
This option tells the software that the menu item auto price is percentage
based instead of dollar based. This only works for discounts, so when
you enter a percentage it will discount the item but cannot be used for
charging more than 100% of the item base cost.
Order Entry
Field Name
Show Unsent Items in
Green
Description
This option will mark all items that you have ordered in Green in the
order entry screen. This is helpful in preventing accidental reordering of
items and is a good feature to have on for visual accuracy.
This tells the software to show the Amount Due in the order entry in
Order Entry Amount Due
yellow. This option is used for people who may be color blind or have
in Yellow
problems seeing red.
Only Secure change price
feature on already sent
items
This feature will allow price changes on items that have not been sent to
the kitchen. This will allow the server to perform a price change on items
and send them to the kitchen. If they try to go back to change the price
again on the same item the software will require a person with a high
enough security to approve the second change.
Disallow Edit of Existing

Open Order in Order
Entry
This option will not allow the editing of an order at all after it has been
sent. You will also not be able to edit an order from Recall.
Hide Voided Item From

Order Screen
This option will NOT show any items that have been voided on the Order
Entry screen.
Hide Expired Hold Time
This option will make the Item/Order hold time disappear once the hold
time has expired.
Void Item Require

Explanation
This option will require an explanation anytime a void item is performed.
Show Coupon
This option will show a reminder screen prompting the user to enter any
Confirmation on Finish in
coupons before the order is completely settled.
Order Entry
326
Coupon Confirmation
Exclude Dine-In in Order
Entry
This option will NOT ask for coupon confirmation when using Dine-In
order entry. All other order types will not be affected by this option.
Disable Half Portion
This option will Not show the Half key in the order entry screen.
This option will save an order, even if no items have been entered. This
Allow Save Order without
will leave the ticket open for future use without having to enter at least
Any Items
one item on the ticket.
Misc. Features Lock

Override in Order Entry
This drop down list tells the software what the minimum level of security
that an employee must have to be able to override the lock on the Misc.
button in order entry. For example if you only want employees with a
security level of 4 to be able to override the lock then select 4 from this
drop down list.
Fire Kitchen 1-6
These options allow the user to send a fire command to the kitchen once
they are ready for a specific part of the order to be prepared. This feature
is useful if you have orders that have items that do not need to be cooked
right away. For example if you send an order to the kitchen with an
appetizer, salad, and a main course lobster, since the lobster wont need
to be cooked until after the salad is prepared and served then you can hit
the Fire button in the Recall screen to tell the kitchen to cook the lobster.
Void Item / Order Quick

Reason
These fields allow you enter a few quick reasons that a void maybe
performed to cut down on the servers time needed to do a void. For
example, Mistake on Order would be one because a lot of times voids
have to be done due to errors while ordering.
Other
Field Name
Description
Confirm Exit Program
This option will prompt the user to confirm that they really want to shut
down the program. It is recommended that this option be selected in order
to prevent unwanted closing of the software.
Exit Program Security
This drop down list allows you to set the minimum security level needed
for exiting and minimizing the program. For example if you want only
employees with a level 4 or higher access level to be able to exit or
minimize the program then select 4 from the drop down list.
Open Order Reminder

After (Hours)
This field will specify the number of hours an order can be in open status
before a reminder is shown on screen notifying the user of the open order.
Change Server Security
This field will specify the minimum security level needed to change the
server of an order.
327
Search By Order Number

in Recall Screen
This option will search by the order number in the Recall screen. If this
option is enabled the Barcode on the bottom of the ticket will also be the
order number and not the ticket number. By default the search is done by
ticket number.
Disable Smart Ticket

Search
With this feature enabled, all of the open orders will show up in the recall
screen and will hide the settled and voided orders.
Enable Advanced Back

Office Protection
This option allows you to set additional security to Data Source, Store,
Security and Station Settings, Employee files, Video Surveillance
Controls, and Reports. For example you could have a security level of 4
to get into the back office but would need a security level of 5 to access
any of the features that were mentioned above.
Show Secured Credit

Card Number
This option allows you to see the full credit card number on the receipt
instead of a series of Xs.
Disable Auto Print Bank

Report
This option allows you to disable the liability report auto print function
when signing out a cash drawer.
Enable Bar Tab PreAuthorization
This option will allow the user to run a credit card pre-auth for a predetermined amount on a Bar Tab order. Once this amount is reached, the
bartender will have to settle the tab and create a new one with a new preauth amount.
Bar Tab PreAuthorization Amount
This field is where you will set the Bar Tab Pre-Authorization amount.
24 Hour Operation Mode
This options enables the Next Day Transfer button in Operations >
Revenue Center. This will transfer all open orders to 1 minute after the
Daily Start Time which will be the next day.
Show Non Resettable

Grand Total
This option will show the Grand Total on the daily closing report. This
total is the grand total for the restaurant since it was opened and cannot be
reset.
Bakery Pastries Tax 2

Exempt if All Bakery
Pastries Quantity is 6 or
More (Otherwise, treat it
as prepared food)
This setting works in conjunction with the features for Ontario Canada.
Soft Drinks Tax 2 Exempt

if Sold with Prepare Food
This setting works in conjunction with the features for Ontario Canada.
and Sub Total is Below
Tax 2 Exempt Trigger
Amount
328
Enable Table Group Tip

Sharing
This option will enable the sharing of tips on the total sales for a
particular table group. The total shared is the sales for that table group
before taxes. This option only works for Staff Bank and will show up on
the Bank Liability Report.
Hide Tip Sharing

Formula on Staff
Banking Report
This option will hide the formula on the bank liability report that is used
to calculate the shared tip amounts so that the server that has to share will
not see what percentages that have been setup for other people.
Manager Alert Pager

Number
This will specify the pager number of the manager pager. All manager
type pages specified in the software under Manager Alerts when
configuring the paging options.
Pizza Size Alias 1-10
This will specify name for each pizza size. Examples are Small,
Medium, Large, etc.
Pizza Size Half Topping

Price 1-10
This will specify the half topping price for the same size as the option
above.
Aldelo Finger Print

Server Data Source
This option will specify where the fingerprint database is located on local
system or network. It is recommended that it is located on the same
system as the server computer for speed. Double click to bring up open
file dialog box.
Aldelo Kitchen Display

Server IP Address
This option will specify the IP address of the computer that has the
Aldelo Kitchen Display Server running.
Aldelo Kitchen Display

Server IP Port
This option will specify the IP port number specified in the configuration
of the Kitchen Display Server settings.
Hostess / Paging Setup > General
Field Name
Description
Paging Receiver COM

Port
This option will specify the COM port where the receiver is installed.
Paging Receiver COM

Settings
This field will specify the COM settings for the device. The format is
[Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits, Stop Bits] without the brackets.
Page Server When New

Table is Assigned
This option will page the server that has been assigned to a table.
View Closed Reservations This drop down list will specify the security level of people who will be
/ Waiting List Security allowed to see closed reservations and waiting list entries.
Level
329
Re-Open Closed
Reservations / Waiting
List Security Level
This drop down list will specify the security level of people who will be
allowed to re-open reservations and waiting list entries that have already
been closed.
Default Table Usage

Minutes
This field will specify the minutes that a table will be reserved for. If
customers usually stay and eat for 2 hours, you will want to enter 120 in
this field.
Staff Paging Register

Pager Security Level
This drop down list will specify the security level required to register a
pager in the Staff Paging screen located in the Time Card section of the
software.
Staff Paging Send Page

Security Level
This drop down list will specify the security level required to send a page
in the Staff Paging screen located in the Time Card section of the
software.
Staff Paging Shortcut

Messages 1-8
These fields will specify standard messages you send to save the hassle
of having to type them out every time you want to send a page.
Hostess / Paging Setup > Reservations

Field Name
Description
Minimum Advance Days
This field will specify the minimum number of days required before a
reservation can be given. If you allow reservations on the same day they
are created, use 0.
Maximum Advanced
Days
This field will specify the maximum number of days out a reservation can
be made. If you have no limit, enter 0.
Hold Reservation Open

After Time Expired For
(Minutes)
This field will specify the minutes a reservation will be held open after a
reservation was due to show up. Once this time has expired, the
reservation will be marked as a No Show and close the reservation and
re-open the table.
Require Telephone
Number
This option will specify if a phone number is required before a reservation

can be created.
Print Seating Chit
This option will print a chit with the number of people, party name, table
number and server assigned to the table. This will be printed once the
reservation has been checked in.

Disable Reservation
Feature
330
This feature will disable the reservation tab in the software.

Hostess / Paging Setup > Waiting List
Field Name
Description
This field will specify the number of minutes after you are assigned to the
Auto Page Priority Status waiting list until you will start receiving status notifications. A status
update will be sent to the pager once a party in front of you bumped off
After (Minutes)
the list for any reason.
Require Pager
Assignment on Creation
This option will require a pager to be assigned anytime an entry is added

to the waiting list.
Require Table
Assignment on Check In
This option will require the party to be assigned a table when they are
checked in.
Print Guest Chit
This option will print a chit with the party name and the number of people
when an entry is created in the waiting list.
Print Seating Chit
This option will print a chit with the number of people, name of party,
table number, and server name.
Disable Waiting List

Feature
This option will disable all waiting list functions.

Hostess / Paging Setup > Manager Alerts
Field Name
Description
Sales Update Every

(Minutes)
This field will specify the number of minutes between sales updates that
are sent to a manager pager. Sales Update Info includes Total Sales,
number of guests and average check.
Clock Out Alert Every

(Minutes)
This option will specify the number of minutes in between pages for
employees that have forgot to clock out.
Reservation Walk Out

Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime there is a Walk Out.
Waiting List No Show

Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime there is a No Show.
Enter Back Office Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone accesses the
back office.
Employee Setup Alert
employee setup screen.
331
Data Source Setup Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone tries to change
that data source.
Backup Performed Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone performs a
backup.
Store Settings Setup Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone accesses Store
Settings in the Back Office.
Security Settings Setup

Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone accesses
Security Settings in the Back Office.
Station Settings Setup

Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone accesses
Station Settings in the Back Office.
Exit Program Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone exits the
program.
No Sale Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone performs a No
Sale
Split Order Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone splits and order.
Combine Order Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone combines an
order
Refund Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone performs a
refund.
Pay Out Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone performs a pay
out.
Staff Banking
Discrepancy Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime a Staff Bank shows a
discrepancy while ending their Staff Bank.
Cashier Discrepancy
Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime a Cash Drawer shows a
discrepancy while closing the cash drawer.
Void Item Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone voids and item.
Void Order Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone voids and
order.
Late Clock In Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone clocks in late.
Edit Time Card Alert
edit time card screen.
332
Create Credit Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone creates a
credit.
Insufficient Security Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone enters an
access code and is denied access.
SQL Screen Access Alert
SQL query screen.
Registry Screen Access

Alert
registry screen.
Menu Item Outage Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime a menu item cannot be
ordered due to inventory being 0.
Change Price Alert
This option will alert the manager pager anytime someone changes the
price of a menu item.
Hostess / Paging Setup > Pagers
Field Name
Description
Pager #
This is the number of the pager that is used when assigning pagers to
customers and employees
Capcode
This is the capcode number given by the pager vendor. This is used by
the transmitter to page the correct pager.
Baud Rate
This is the baud rate used for the pagers. The default is 1200.
Tone
This is the tone that will be used for the pager when it sounds. There are
4 options. 0,1,2, and 3
Alphanumeric
This option specifies if this is a pager that supports text.
333
Security Settings
Security Settings
Security Settings
Security Name
Access Delivery Status
Minimum Default
Description
This security setting lets you specify the minimum level of security
required to access the Delivery Status feature in the Main POS menu.
Override Default
Sec Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Access Driver Tracking
Minimum Default
1
Description
This security setting lets you specify the minimum level of security to
access the Driver feature in the Main POS menu.
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Adjust Price in Order
Entry
Minimum Default
4
Description
required to change the menu item price when in the Order Entry screen.
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Approve Cash Register
Discrepancies
Minimum Default
4
Description
required to approve a cash drawer discrepancy issue when the cashier is
performing a Cashier Out.
Override Default

Checked

Cashier Out Another Persons Cash Register
334
Security Settings
Security Name
Description
required to access the Back Office.
Access Back Office

Minimum Default
5
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Description
Cash Discount Amount

Entry
This option lets you specify the minimum level of security required to use
a cash discount in Order Entry.
Minimum Default
3
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Apply Credit Usage
Require Manager
Minimum Default
3
Description
This option lets you specify the minimum level of security required to
apply a credit to an order in the Order Entry screen.
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Description
Access Daily Closing

Report
review the Closing Report in Operations > Revenue Center screen. This
security setting will also disable the Revenue Center and In House Charge
buttons in Operations. This security also is used for the Assign Table
feature in Operations > Other Tools.
Minimum Default
5
Override Default

Checked

Ability to access the Revenue Center in Operations.
Reverting and Order / Settlement
335
Security Settings
Security Name
Discounts Require
Manager
Minimum Default
3
Description
apply a discount toward the order or item in the Order Entry screen.
Override Default

Unchecked
Security Name
Edit Delivery
Compensation Amount
Minimum Default
3
Description
modify the delivery driver compensation amount when in the Customer
Information screen.
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Description
Edit Unpaid Employee

Time Cards
This option lets you specify the minimum level of security required to edit
any unpaid employee time cards inside the Time Card screen.
Minimum Default
4
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Create New Orders
Minimum Default
1
Description
create a new order.
Override Default

Checked
336
Security Settings
Security Name
Exclusive Cash Register
Access
Minimum Default
Description
This security will block other employees from gaining access to the cash
drawer or Settle functions on this station when the cashier is signed in,
except for those employees/managers with security levels greater to or
equal to the Override Security Level.
Override Default
3
Security Name
Exclusive Server Access

Checked
Description
This security will block other servers from accessing the current servers
orders for edit or print, unless their security level passes the Override
Security Level specified here.
Minimum Default
Override Default
3
Checked
Reprint Guest Check / Customer Receipt Requires Manager Override
Security Name
Approval of Clock In
Time Not On Schedule
Minimum Default
4
Description
This security setting will specify the minimum level of security required
to perform a forced employee clock in. The forced employee clock in is
useful when they are working but are not scheduled to do so.
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Issue Refund To Customer
Minimum Default
4
Description
This security setting specifies the minimum level of security required to
issue a refund to the customer. This also sets the security for reverting
orders to unpaid status.
Override Default

Checked
337
Security Settings
Security Name
Maintain Customer
Credits
Minimum Default
4
Description
create new customer credits.
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Description
Maintain Gift Certificates

access the Maintain Gift Certificates in the Back Office under Activities >
Customer Activities > Maintain Gift Certificates.
Minimum Default
4
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Description
Access Manual Modifier

Screen

go into the Manual modifier entry screen when inside the Modifier screen
in Order Entry.
Minimum Default
3
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Access Miscellaneous
Features in Operations
Minimum Default
3
Description
access the Inventory Activities button in the Operation screen.
Override Default

Checked
338
Security Settings
Security Name
Do Not Print Duplicate
Order To Bar
Minimum Default
Description
When you enable this setting, the system will not send already printed
items to the bar printer as long as there are no changes to the order.
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Do Not Print Duplicate
Order to Kitchen
Minimum Default
Description
When you enable this setting, the system will not send already printed
items to the kitchen printer as long as there are no changes to the order.
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Description
Access No Sale Feature

access the No Sale feature. If the employee is the cashier for this drawer,
this feature will still be enforced. If the Access No Sale Require Manager
security is enabled, this security will not work
Minimum Default
1
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Access No Sale Require
Explanation
Minimum Default
Description
This security option lets you require an explanation as to why a No Sale
was performed.
Override Default

Checked
339
Security Settings
Security Name
Access No Sale Require

Manager
Minimum Default
3
Description
This security option lets you require a manager to perform a No Sale.
This security overrides the Access No Sale Feature security.
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Apply Gratuity Require
Manager in Order Entry
Minimum Default
3
Description
apply an order gratuity when inside the Order Entry window.
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Issue Payout To Vendor
Minimum Default
4
Description
required to make a Pay Out operation.
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Recall Existing Order
Minimum Default
1
Description
required to perform the Recall feature.
Override Default

Checked
340
Security Settings
Security Name
Accept Gift Certificate
Redemption
Minimum Default
3
Description
apply a Gift Certificate payment type.
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Description
Cashier Sign In/Cashier

Sign Out
required to perform Cashier In and Cashier Out operations. This will also
disable the Frequent Diner and Other Tools buttons in Operations.
Minimum Default
1
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Apply Surcharge Require
Manager
Minimum Default
3
Description
required to apply a surcharge to an order in the Order Entry screen.
Override Default

Unchecked
Security Name
Accept Complimentary
Payment
Minimum Default
4
Description
required to make an order complimentary
Override Default

Checked
341
Security Settings
Security Name
Accept In House Charge

Payment
Minimum Default
3
Description
required to apply an In House Charge Payment.
Override Default

Checked
Security Name
Void Order or Items
Minimum Default
3
Description
required to void orders or items.
Override Default

Checked
Station Settings
342
Station Settings
General
Field Name
Description
Station Number
This field displays the station number of this station. This number is
generated automatically by the software and therefore cannot be edited
using traditional methods like fields or check boxes. In order to edit this
number, SQL statements must be used to delete the station number info in
the database which will in turn remove all sales info from the database due
to this data being associated with all transactions. This is only to be done
by Aldelo Systems Inc. or a qualified technician.
Computer Name
This field displays the name of your computer based on the computers
name in the Windows network.
Station Language
This drop down list will specify the desired language of this station. The
employee default language will override this option.
Station Language
This drop down list will specify the desired language of this station. The
employee default language will override this option.
System Language
Settings
This feature will customize your language settings. You can use different
fonts to customize you POS system allowing you to match the look of the
POS with the restaurant environment. You will need to experiment before
making a final decision on a font. The Charset does not need to be
changed as it will cause the system to become unreadable if changed to
something not recognized by the user. There are three sections in this
screen.
Interface Display
This will change the font of the words on all screens in the POS system.
For example, if you wanted to use Times New Roman as your POS font
you would type Times New Roman in the field next to your language.
This field will also allow you to display the correct font for different
languages that you may want to use with Aldelo For Restaurants. Type in
the font name of the language you wish to display.
40 Column POS Receipt
This will change the font Aldelo for Restaurants displays in the Order
Entry screen for the ticket. This would allow some flexibility on making
the words easier to read in some cases. For example, if you wanted to use
Times New Roman as your ticket display font you would type Times
New Roman in the field next to your language. This field will also allow
you to display the correct font for different languages that you may want
to use with Aldelo For Restaurants. Type in the font name of the language
you wish to display.
343
Station Settings
80 Column Report
This allows the user to choose a Fixed-Width font to use for the 80 column
reports in the Back Office > Reports. These must be Fixed-Width or the
columns will not line up correctly. Fixed-Width fonts are hard to come by
for free as there are only a few included with Windows. Courier and
Lucida Console are examples of Fixed Width fonts included with
Windows. Other fonts can be purchased on the web or as a software
package in a retail store. This field will also allow you to display the correct
font for different languages that you may want to use with Aldelo For
Restaurants. Type in the font name of the language you wish to display.
This option will enable the video surveillance capture feature. What this
feature does is it takes a snap shot (with any web cam that is supported by
Enable Video Surveillance Netmeeting from Microsoft) whenever certain functions are being
performed, such as a No Sale or Void. At what time snap shots are taken can
Captures
be edited in the back office under the Activities > General Activities > Video
Surveillance Control Center.
Backup Prompt Time
This field will specify the time that you want your automatic backup to be
triggered. For example if you want the automatic backup to be started at
12am then simply enter 12am in this field.
Automatic Backup
This option will automatically backup the database at the Backup Prompt
Time which is specified in the Backup Prompt Time field mentioned
above. This is highly recommended as frequent backups are essential to
saving valuable data. A manual backup must be performed before the
automatic backup can take place.
Station Specific Picture
This field will specify the picture that you want to show on the right side of
the Main POS windows. To use this field simply click on the button with 3
dots on it and select the picture that you would like. To remove the picture,
simply click the Red X.
Station Background
This option will specify a station background picture. This image will be
active throughout the software and not just in the back office.
Cashier
Field Name
Description
Show Cashier Features
This option will show all of the register features in the POS. For example,
with this option you will see the Settle, Pay Out, Gift Certificate, and
various other buttons in the POS. Without this option enabled the register
features will not be shown and orders cannot be settled other than with
Staff Bank.
Auto Recognize This

Stations Cashier as the
Default Employee
without Login
This option will automatically recognize the cashier on this station as the
default employee. This eliminates the need to enter an access code when
performing functions in the POS.
Station Settings
Stay In Settle Screen
344
This option will allow quick order settlement. Once you have settled an
order it will bring up the Recall Order screen to allow you to select the
next order to settle.
Change Due Screen Time This option will define the number of seconds that will pass before the
Change Due screen will close.
Out Seconds
This option will specify a currency name to be printed on the guest check.
Foreign Currency Name
This should include the currency symbol if possible. For Example:
To Show On Guest Check
Canadian $
Foreign Currency Rate
To Calculate On Guest
Check
This option will specify the exchange rate that will be used to calculate the
foreign currency amount on the guest check. This will be something like
1.59 or .78 if the foreign currency is stronger than the currency being
used by default.
Settles Only
This drop down list will specify 1 specific order type that this station can
settle. For example if you want this station to only settle Dine In Orders
then select Dine In from the drop down list.
Quick Service
Field Name
Description
Stay in Order Entry

Screen After Order Is
Finished
This option will stay in the order entry screen after the Send or Settle
buttons are pressed. By default you will be sent to the Main POS screen.
Disable Done / Chain In

Order Entry Screen
This option will turn off the Send and Chain buttons in Order Entry.
Blind Cash Tender In

Order Entry
This option does not prompt the user to enter in the amount tendered. The
software will assume that the amount collected was the exact amount due.
Dine In Use Quick

Service Order Screen
This option allows you to use the Quick Service screen for Dine In orders.
Bar Tab Use Quick

Service Screen
This option allows you to use the Quick Service screen for Bar Tab
orders.
345
Station Settings
Take Out Use Quick

Service Screen
Drive Thru Use Quick
Service Screen
Delivery Use Quick
Service Screen
Quick Service Screen
Auto Log Out Seconds
This option allows you to use the Quick Service screen for Take Out
orders.
This option allows you to use the Quick Service screen for Drive Thru
orders.
This option allows you to use the Quick Service screen for delivery
orders.
This option will specify the number of seconds before the Quick Service
screen logs the current user out after an order has been created.
Other Options
Field Name
Description
Auto show all orders as

the default order type in
order recall
This option will show All Orders whenever the user goes to Recall in the
POS. For example, whenever you go into Recall you will see all orders
regardless whether they are Take Out, Dine In, Drive Thru, Etc. If your
restaurant does large amounts of business, the load time of the recall
screen will increase and become a problem. It is a good idea to uncheck
this if you are noticing this issue.
Auto show currently

logged in servers orders
in recall
This option will automatically show the currently logged in servers

orders in Recall. For example, if Jon uses Recall and enters his access
code, then all orders that are shown are only Jon's orders. This option is
another way to speed up the access time when using the Recall button.
Stay In Table Selection

Screen After Dine In
Order Completes
This option will stay in the table selection screen once a dine-in order is
complete. This will make the order entry process one step faster. This
option also assumes the same server is currently logged in.
Do not prompt user to

enter customer phone
number for take out on
this station
This option will Not to prompt the user for the customers phone number
when taking a Take Out order. By default the user will be prompted to
enter the customers phone number.
Mark this station as a

drive thru station
This option will mark this station as a drive thru station. This option is
used in conjunction with the Drive Thru Orders Use Drive Thru Stations
in Store Settings > Services > Drive Thru.
Station Settings
346
Direct Login Screen
This drop down list allows you to specify the screen that you want the
system to go to whenever an access code is just entered or access card is
swiped from the Main POS screen. For example if you wanted the system
to go directly to the Dine In screen when an access code is entered or
access card swiped then simply select Dine In from this drop down list.
This is useful with MSR cards in allowing a card to be swiped when in the
Main POS screen and going straight to the Dine In or Recall screens,
logging in the user at the same time.
Enable bar tab services

for this station
This option will enable Bar Tab services for this specific station. With
this option enabled, you will have the ability to create bar tab orders on
this station.
Skip Table / Bar Type

Selection for Dine In
This option will bypass the table selection and Bar Tab creation and takes
the user directly into the order entry screen for quicker use. This option is
useful in fast paced bar type scenarios. This option is also the same as the
Skip Table Selection Screen in Store Settings only on a per station basis.
Bar drink items will not

charge sales tax ( Applies
to bar orders on this
station only)
This option allows the user to not charge sales tax on Bar drink items
when ordered through the Bar Tab feature.
Bar Tab Caption
This field allows you to enter a custom caption for your bar tab. For
example if you want your bar tab to be called Liquor Stop then type that
in this field. This will print before the customers name on the Guest
receipt when it prints out.
Station Receipt Message
This option allows you to enter in a message specific to this station. For
example, if you wanted the ticket to say Thank You for Visiting our
Restaurants Bar, Come Again! you would enter this here.
Export Settings
This button will export the current station settings to a test file that can be
imported into another station to speed up configuration of the systems.
Import Settings
This button will import the station settings from a text file exported by
another station. This greatly reduces the amount of time it takes to
configure several stations in a large installation.
Printer > Receipt Printer
Field Name
Receipt Printer
Description
This drop down list allows you to select the printer that you would like to
have as the receipt printer. When you drop this list down, be sure to select
the correct printer to use as the stations receipt printer. There might be
several to choose from depending on how many you have installed on the
network.
347
Station Settings
Receipt Printer Type
This drop down list allows you to select the printer type for your receipt
printer. In general you will select the printer type that matches your
receipt printer. For example if you select Epson TM-T88II as your
receipt printer then select Epson TM-T88II/III Large Font Autocut as
your receipt printer type. You can also change the size of the text by
specifying a different printer type. For example the Ultra Large Print
Support printer type will make your receipt printing much larger.
Receipt Logo Control

Code
This option allows your receipt printer to print your companies logo on
the receipt. To use this option you will need to enter the receipt logo
control code, which can be obtained by consulting the user manual that
came with the receipt printer. The Epson control codes are natively
supported.
Epson TM Code
This button will automatically enter the Epson Control Code for printing
logos
Do not prompt user to

print guest check when
finished in order entry
screen
This option tells the software NOT to prompt the user to print a guest
check once the order has been completed in Order Entry. By default the
software will prompt to print the check at the completion of the order.
Printer > Packager Printer
Field Name
Description
Packager Printer
This drop down list allows you to specify the printer on your network you
would like to designate as the packager printer. Simply drop this list
down and select the desired printer.
Packager Printer Type
This drop down list allows you to select the printer type for the packager
printer on this station. In general you will use the printer type that
matches the packager printer. You can also change the font of your bar
printer by specifying a different printer type, for example the Ultra Large
Print Support printer type will make your bar printing much larger.
Printer > Packager Printer
Field Name
Description
Kitchen Title
This field allows you to specify a name for your number one printer. For
example, if you wanted this printer to be called Main Printer then type
Main Printer in this field.
Kitchen Printer 1 - 6
This drop down list allows you to specify the printer on the system that
you would like to designate as the kitchen printer(s). Simply drop this list
down and select the desired printer.
Station Settings
Kitchen Printer Type

1-6
348
This field allows you to specify the printer type for the Kitchen printer.
Usually you will select the printer type that matches your printer. For
example, if you have an Epson TM-U200 as the kitchen printer, then
select one of the Epson TM-U200 printer types from the Type drop
down list. You can also increase the font by selecting the Ultra Large
Printer types from this drop down list. This might make the words too big
to fit on the ticket so use with caution.
Printer > Kitchen / Bar > Bar
Field Name
Description
Bar Title
This field allows you to specify a name for your number one printer. For
example, if you wanted this printer to be called Main Printer then type
Main Printer in this field.
Bar Printer
This drop down list allows you to specify the printer on your system that
you would like to designate as the bar printer for this station. Simply drop
the list down and select the desired printer.
Bar Printer Type
This drop down list allows you to select the printer type for the bar printer.
In general you will use the printer type that matches the bar printer. This
field is much like the Receipt Printer type drop down list. You can also
change the size of the text by specifying a different printer type. For
example the Ultra Large Print Support printer type will make your receipt
printing much larger.
Printer > Label Printer
Field Name
Description
1 x 3 Label Printer
will be designated as the label printer on this station. Simply drop the list
down and select the desired printer. An example label printer is the Eltron
LP2844.
4 x 1.5 Pizza Label

Printer
This drop down list allows you to specify the printer that will print out the
pizza labels on 4 x 1.5 labels.
Printer > Report Printer
Field Name
Report Printer
Description
will be designated as the report printer on this station. Simply drop the list
down and select the desired printer. This is a typical desktop printer.
Keep in mind that the closing report will be printed out on the receipt
printer and not the report printer.
349
Station Settings
Printer > Other
Field Name
Description
Journal Printer
This option allows you to print out a duplicate of the guest receipt on an
additional printer. When you specify a printer here, it will create an exact
duplicate of the guest receipt.
Journal Printer Type
This field allows you to specify the printer type for the Journal printer.
Usually you will select the printer type that matches your printer. For
example if you have a Epson TM-U200 as the Journal printer then select
one of the Epson TM-U200 printer types from the Type drop down list.
This option allows you to print out a duplicate of the In House Charge Slip
Remote In House Charge
on an additional printer. When you specify a printer here is will create an
Printer
exact duplicate of the In House Charge Slip.
This field allows you to specify the printer type for the Remote In House
Remote In House Charge
Charge Slip printer. Usually you will select the printer type that matches
Printer Type
your printer
Port Settings
Field Name
Description
Caller ID COM Port
In this field you will specify the COM port your Caller ID device is
connected to.
Caller ID Init String
In this drop down list you will choose which caller ID box you will use or
Init string your modem needs to operate. Refer to the modems user
manual to find the AT commands. Use this information to determine the
correct Caller ID Init String. The modems Caller ID should be able to
work in HyperTerminal before it will work in Aldelo For Restaurants.
Pole Display COM Port
If you are using a pole display, you will select the Com port this device is
connected to.
Pole Message Row 1
In this field you will enter the message that you want to show up on the
first row of your Pole Display. For example if you want the first row to
say Pizza Factory, enter Pizza Factory in this field.
Pole Message Row 2
In this field you will enter the message that you want to show up on the
second row of your Pole Display. For example, if you want the second
row to say Best Pizza In Town, enter Best Pizza In Town in this field.
Station Settings
350
Home Control Code
This field will have the code that determines where the Home position of the
cursor is. If you are using the UTC command set than you will not need to
enter the code in this field. If you dont use the UTC command set than you
will need to refer to the users manual of your Pole Display for this code or
contact the manufacture.
:Hide Cursor Control

Code
This field will have the code that hides the cursor. If you are using the UTC
command code you will not need to enter the code in this field. If you are
not using the UTC command code you will need to refer to the users manual
of your Pole Display for this code or contact the manufacture.
Serial Cash Drawer COM

Port
In this drop down list you choose the Com port that your Serial Cash drawer
is connected to. This is only used if you directly connecting your cash
drawer to your computer. If you have the cash drawer connected to the
printer this field will not be used.
Cash Drawer Open Code
If you are using a SERIAL driven cash drawer you need to enter the code to
open the cash drawer in this field which is usually BEL. If BEL does not
work contact the manufacturer of the cash drawer to ask for the cash drawer
open codes. Remember this is only used in cash drawers that are directly
connected to the computer.
Weight Scale COM Port
This drop down menu will allow you to select the Com port your weight
scale is connected to.
Weight Scale Type
Aldelo for Restaurants supports the 6700 family of weight scales which can
be selected from this drop down menu.
Serial MSR COM Port
This drop down list will allow you to select the Com port your MSR card
reader is connected to.
Advanced Buttons
These buttons allows the user to configure the port settings for each of the
different Com Ports. These settings will override any Windows settings
you may have.
351
Advanced Settings
Advanced Settings
These setting are features that will enable more advanced options in the software. These options can be
found in Back Office > Help > Technical Support > F10. This will bring up the screen with all the
features listed. To edit a feature, highlight the feature and click Edit.
Advanced Settings
Field Name
Description
Auto Price Item Not

Discountable
This feature will prevent items that have auto pricing from being
discounted
Bank Liability Report

Show Summary Only
This feature will hide the Order Payment section on the Bank Liability
report.
Calculator Path
This will change the path the software will use to open the calculator
program.
CISP
This will enable the recording of credit card numbers in the Aldelo
database. This feature is recommended to be left as the default.
Combine Security Level
This feature will enable a security for the combine feature in order entry.
Daily Closing Hide

Employee Time Cards
This will hide the employee time card section of the closing report. This
will save paper.
Daily Closing Hide

Gratuity Recap
This will hide the gratuity recap on the closing report. This will save
paper
Daily Closing Show

Tender Details
This will show the Tender Details in the Closing Report
Debit Alias
This will change the name of the Debit button in the Settle screen
Debit Pay Security Level
This feature will enable a security for the Debit button in the Settle screen
This will change the default order type being viewed in the recall screen.
You must first turn off the feature Auto show all orders as the default
order type in order recall. This feature is located in Station Settings >
Other Options.
Default Order Type in

Recall
1 = Dine In
2 = Bar Tab
3 = Take Out
4 = Drive Thru
5 = Delivery
Advanced Settings
352
Disable Comp
This will hide the Comp button in the Settle screen.
Disable Credit
This will hide the Credit button in the Settle screen.
Disable Gift Cert
This will hide the Gift Certificate button in the Settle screen.
Disable Kitchen Bar Chit

When Pickup Chit
Enabled
This will disable pickup chits for the kitchen and bar type orders when
chits are globally enabled.
Disable Pickup Chits For

Bar Tab
This will disable pickup chits for the bar type orders when chits are
globally enabled.

Delivery
This will disable pickup chits for delivery bar type orders when chits are
globally enabled.

Dine In
This will disable pickup chits for Dine In type orders when chits are
globally enabled.

Drive Thru
This will disable pickup chits for Drive Thru type orders when chits are
globally enabled.

Take Out
This will disable pickup chits for Take Out type orders when chits are
globally enabled.
Disable Quarters
This will disable the Quarters pizza section in the pizza builder screen.
Disable Startup Warning
This will disable the two pop ups when you first start the software about
your screen resolution and taskbar
Disable Thirds
This will disable the thirds pizza section in the pizza builder screen.
Do Not Print Notes On

Guest Check
This will disable the Notes to the kitchen on the guest check so customers
will not see them.
Enable Advanced
Fingerprint Security
This will enable the Advanced Fingerprint integration.
Enable Caller ID Trace

File
This will create a text file of the Caller ID modems output to the serial
port. This is used for troubleshooting caller id formats
Enable Coin Dispenser
This will enable the Coin Dispenser integration
Factura
This will enable the Factura number regardless of the regional language
settings.
353
Advanced Settings
Enable Marked
Surcharge As Tip
This will show a surcharge as a tip on the guest check. The surcharge
must have <TIP> in the surcharge description for this to function
properly.
Enable Virtual Print
This will send the print job to a text file for testing purposes.
Factura Alias
This will change the name of the word Factura
GC Auto Deplete Both
This will enable the gift card auto deplete to use both Percent and
Amount.
GC Auto Deplete Greater This will deplete the amount that is greater when depleting using percent
AND amount.
Of
GC Auto Deplete Percent
This is the percentage to use when depleting value from the gift
certificate.
GC Auto Deplete Recur

Days
This is the number of days between depletion actions
Gift Card Discount

Security Level
This feature will enable a security for discounts on gift cards.
Grouped Fire Hold On

Bar Chits
Bar Receipts to group hold items and normally submitted items, fire,
separately on the receipt. (Any items not on hold or voided will be
considered fire items.) (Option of Enable Delayed Send Order Feature
should Not be selected in Store Settings>Print tab>Kitchen/Bar tab.)
Grouped Fire Hold On

Kitchen Chits
Kitchen Receipts to group hold items and normally submitted items, fire,
separately on the receipt. (Any items not on hold or voided will be
considered fire items.) (Option of Enable Delayed Send Order Feature
should Not be selected in Store Settings>Print tab>Kitchen/Bar tab.)
Hide No Cost Item From

Guest Receipt
This will hide no cost items from the guest check.
Hide Rounding From

Guest Chit
This will hide the amount added to the check when rounding is used.
Include ChineseBig5 In
Language Toggle
This will include the Chinese Big 5 option when using the secondary
language toggle in the Order Entry screen
Include Chinese GB In
Language Toggle
This will include the Chinese GB option when using the secondary
Advanced Settings
354
Include English In
Language Toggle
This will include the Chinese English option when using the secondary
Include Spanish In
Language Toggle
This will include the Chinese Spanish option when using the secondary
KDS End Signal
This is for Microplus KDS integration and is only used for that system.
LCS IP Address
This is the IP Address of the system running the Aldelo Liquor Controller
Server.
LCS IP Port
This is the IP Port number that the Aldelo Liquor Controller Server is
using to communicate on the network with the POS software.
MapPoint Enabled
This will enable the MapPoint integration
MapPoint Europe
This will enable the MapPoint Europe Version integration
MapPoint Fuel Cost
This will define the per gallon cost for fuel
MapPoint Home Address This will allow you to enter the address of the restaurant.
MapPoint Optimize Way
Points
This will enable the route optimization feature.
MapPoint Route Start

Minutes After
This will allow you to enter the number of minutes that will be added to
the route time to give an estimated delivery time.
Master Cashier Station
This will define this as the master station in a Master / Slave scenario.
Modified Kitchen Chit

Alias
This will allow you to change the word Modified on the kitchen chit.
NIT Number
This is the number assigned to you by the locale government. This is

usually used in Latin countries.
No Cash Tender
This will disable the Cash button in the Settle screen.
No Check Tender
This will disable the Check button in the Settle screen.
No Gift Certificate
Tender
This will disable the Gift Certificate button in the Settle screen.
355
Advanced Settings
No House Account
Tender
This will disable the House Account button in the Settle screen.
On Hold Until Notified

Chit Alias
This will allow you to change the message that prints when the "On Hold
Until Notified" button is used during hold operations.
On Screen Keyboard
Caption
This will allow you to change the title bar name of the on-screen
keyboard.
Advanced Settings
Open Price Security
Level
356
This will allow a security to be applied to the Open Price Item feature.
Pizza Most Expensive

Half Toggle Security
Level
This will allow a security to be applied to the toggle to change the half
topping pricing. Scheme.
PMS Application Name
This is the IIS application name for the hotel integration program.
PMS Room Charge
This will enable the hotel integration.
PMS Server Name
This is the IP address or URL of the hotel integration server.
Pole Display Line Chars
This will adjust the number of characters that can be displayed per line on
the pole display.
Pole Display Station

Closed Message
This will allow you to enter a message when the station has no cashier
signed in.
Print Pickup Chits For

Bar Items
This will print chits for individual items after the kitchen ticket prints.
These can be used to attach to the prepared item for delivery to the
customer.
Print Pickup Chits For

Kitchen Items
This will print chits for individual items after the kitchen ticket prints.
These can be used to attach to the prepared item for delivery to the
customer.
Require MSR End Char
This is used by Aldelo Systems Development dept for debugging.
Resource Debug
This will show the resource string number in front of the button string.
Secured Back Office

Allow Edit Employees
If advanced back office security is used, this will still allow employees to
edit the employee files.
Show OE Title
This will show the title bar in the Order Entry screen.
Slave Cashier Drawer Off This will disable the ability of the slave station to pop the drawer of the
master station.
Special Z Report
This will enable the Z Report option in Revenue Center.
Split Security Level
This will allow a security to be applied to the Split function.
Staff Bank Closing

Require All Checks
Closed
This will require all checks be closed before ending a Staff Bank.
Staff Bank No Cash

Tender
This will disable the Cash Tender button when using Staff Bank.
357
Advanced Settings
Surveillance Server IP
Address
This is the IP address of the Surveillance system.
Surveillance Server IP
Port
This is the port number of the Surveillance system.
Tax1 Apply On Auto

Gratuity
This will apply Tax 1 to gratuities
Tax2 Apply On Auto

Gratuity
Tax3 Apply On Auto

Gratuity
Time Card 7th

Consecutive Work Day
Double Time
This will enable the option to charge double time on the 7th consecutive
day worked by an employee.
Time Card 7th

This will specify the number of hours that need to be worked on the 7th
Consecutive Work Day
consecutive day before double time is started.
Double Time Hours After
Time Card Allow Clock
In As Scheduled Time
This will allow an employee to clock in before their scheduled time.

Their clock in time will show their scheduled start time.
Time Card Clock In

Grace Minutes
This is the number of minutes an employee is allowed to clock in before

their scheduled start time. This time will be paid unless rounding is used.
Time Card Clock

Rounding Minutes
This will round clock in and out to the nearest quarter hour. The number
you enter is the break point to round up or down.
Time Card Daily Double

Time Hours After
This will specify the number of hours that need to be worked before
double time is paid.
Time Card Daily Over

Time Hours After
This will specify the number of hours that need to be worked before
overtime is paid.
Time Card Holiday Pay

Dates
This will specify the days that will be paid holidays. Enter the date using
the format MM/DD/YYYY. If there is more than 1 date, separate them
with commas.
Time Card Missed Break

Penalty Minutes
This is the number of minutes that will be paid the employee if the
employee misses a break due to working through the break.
Time Card Weekly Over

Time Hours After
This will specify the number of hours that needs to be worked before
weekly overtime is paid.
Title Footer
This is a message that will print below the title on the receipt.
Advanced Settings
358
Turn Off Email
This will disable the email system.
Two Step EDC Settle
This will turn on the Two Step EDC Settle functions.
VIP1 Discount ID
Enter the Discount ID for this VIP Level. The discount ID can be found
in the discounts screen. These are used as special discounts for VIP
customers that you may issue a VIP card to.
VIP2 Discount ID
VIP3 Discount ID
Visa Alias
This will specify another name for the Visa settlement type.
Weight Item Decimal

Zero
This will remove the decimal places on the weighted items when entering
the weight in the order entry screen.
Wireless Screen 480 By

640
This will use the 480 x 640 the resolution of the PDA device to display
the wireless software.
Wireless Screen Height

Pixels
This will specify a custom height in pixels of the wireless software. This
will allow the wireless software to run on any screen size
Wireless Screen Width

Pixels
This will specify a custom width in pixels of the wireless software. This
will allow the wireless software to run on any screen size.
YES-TELE Custom
Command
This will specify a custom init string for the Yes-Tele box.
359

Aldelo 3.0 Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Aldelo 3.0 Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Aldelo For Restaurants

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

PART 1 GETTING STARTED _____________________________________1

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Chapter 2 Network Hardware ______________________________________________________ 14

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

PART 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION _________33

PART 3 SOFTWARE OPERATION_______________________________103

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Starting Your Bank _____________________________________________________________ 108

Tax Exempt _________________________________________________________________ 132

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Chapter 16 Void Procedures _______________________________________________________ 157

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Operations Center ______________________________________________________________ 178

Chapter 22 Maintenance Activities _________________________________________________ 193

PART 4 APPENDIX ___________________________________________297

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

The Structure of the Manual

Any reference to feature names will be show in Bold.

The shorthand notation used to navigate through the software will

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Software on the Server

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Assembling Your Network

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Configuring Windows for Networking

To change the computer name:

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Click Start on the desktop.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

To change the computer name:

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

To change the IP address of Windows XP:

Click Start on the desktop.

Testing Your Network

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

POS Hardware Setup

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

POS Hardware Setup

Setting up the Terminal

Setting up the POS Printers

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.

POS Hardware Setup

Click the Start button located on your Windows taskbar.

Sharing Printers in Windows 2000

Click on the Start button on the Windows desktop.

Copyright 1997 2006 Aldelo Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved.